Prove2Me
Navigate
DiscoverFormalpediaBlogsUsersMomentumMy Missions+
Prove2Me
⌕
Log in

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

Operations Research

911 missions · 514 completed

The discipline of applying mathematical analysis to complex decision problems in operations: allocating scarce resources, scheduling, routing, inventory, and the design of service and production systems. Drawing on mathematical programming, stochastic modeling, queueing, simulation, and game-theoretic reasoning, it seeks policies that perform provably well in systems shaped by constraints, congestion, and uncertainty.

Missions

Open397Completed514All911
🏆Completed
CombinatoricsLinear OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Validation of Subgradient Optimization II: A Unique Optimal Assignment Makes the Dual Optimal Set Full-DimensionalResearch Paper

Why the assignment dual matters

The subgradient method maximizes a concave, piecewise-linear function w(π)=min⁡k{ck+π⋅vk}w(\pi)=\min_k\{c_k+\pi\cdot v_k\}w(π)=mink​{ck​+π⋅vk​} by moving along a subgradient vkv_kvk​ of an active piece with a prescribed step. Held, Wolfe and Crowder's 1974 paper Validation of subgradient optimization tested the method on three families of Lagrangean duals from combinatorial optimization — the assignment problem, a relaxation of the travelling salesman problem in the style of Held and Karp, and multicommodity flows — and gave the first systematic account of when the method works in practice.

On randomly generated assignment problems of order n≤30n\le 30n≤30 the authors observed that the method usually did not merely converge: it stopped, after finitely many steps, at an iterate whose subgradient was exactly zero. Their explanation is a structural fact about the assignment dual, Theorem 3.1 of the paper: when the optimal assignment is unique — the typical case for random integer costs — the set of optimal dual prices has full dimension nnn, so a sequence of steps of decreasing length can land inside it. This mission formalizes that theorem and the steps of its proof.

Setting

There are nnn men and nnn jobs, and a real n×nn\times nn×n cost matrix A=(air)A=(a_{ir})A=(air​): aira_{ir}air​ is the cost for which man iii does job rrr. A one-to-one assignment is a permutation σ\sigmaσ of {1,…,n}\{1,\dots,n\}{1,…,n}, where σ(r)\sigma(r)σ(r) is the man doing job rrr; its cost is ∑raσ(r) r\sum_r a_{\sigma(r)\,r}∑r​aσ(r)r​. The assignment problem (3.1) asks for a permutation of minimal cost; the assignment is unique if exactly one permutation attains that minimum.

The linear relaxation of (3.1), over doubly stochastic matrices x=(xir)x=(x_{ir})x=(xir​), has the dual linear program (3.2), max⁡{∑iπi+∑rρr:πi+ρr≤air}\max\{\sum_i\pi_i+\sum_r\rho_r : \pi_i+\rho_r\le a_{ir}\}max{∑i​πi​+∑r​ρr​:πi​+ρr​≤air​}. For fixed prices π∈Rn\pi\in\mathbb R^nπ∈Rn on the men the best ρ\rhoρ is ρr=min⁡s[asr−πs]\rho_r=\min_s[a_{sr}-\pi_s]ρr​=mins​[asr​−πs​], which leaves the dual function (3.3)

w(π)=∑i=1nπi+∑r=1nmin⁡s [asr−πs],w(\pi)=\sum_{i=1}^n\pi_i+\sum_{r=1}^n\min_s\,[a_{sr}-\pi_s],w(π)=i=1∑n​πi​+r=1∑n​smin​[asr​−πs​],

the inner minimum being over the men sss for each job rrr. The optimal set is Ω={π:w(π′)≤w(π) for all π′}\Omega=\{\pi : w(\pi')\le w(\pi)\ \text{for all }\pi'\}Ω={π:w(π′)≤w(π) for all π′}.

To put www in the form min⁡k{ck+π⋅vk}\min_k\{c_k+\pi\cdot v_k\}mink​{ck​+π⋅vk​} the paper uses assignments in a weaker sense: arbitrary functions A:{1,…,n}→{1,…,n}A:\{1,\dots,n\}\to\{1,\dots,n\}A:{1,…,n}→{1,…,n}, nnn^nnn of them, with cost cA=∑raA(r) rc_A=\sum_r a_{A(r)\,r}cA​=∑r​aA(r)r​ and vector (vA)i=1−#{r:A(r)=i}(v_A)_i=1-\#\{r:A(r)=i\}(vA​)i​=1−#{r:A(r)=i} (3.4). The subgradient step raises the price of a man assigned no job and lowers the price of a man assigned several; vA=0v_A=0vA​=0 exactly when AAA is a permutation.

In the Lean development these are assignCost, assignVec, IsOptimalAssignment, w and optSet in the namespace HeldWolfeCrowder.Assignment.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.1 (p. 70)

If the assignment problem has a unique optimal permutation, then

dim⁡aff⁡ Ω=n.\dim\operatorname{aff}\,\Omega=n .dimaffΩ=n.

The hypothesis is uniqueness among permutations; the conclusion is the dimension of the affine hull of the optimal set.

Milestones, in the order the proof uses them

  1. Eq. (3.4): w(π)=min⁡A{cA+∑iπi(vA)i}w(\pi)=\min_A\{c_A+\sum_i\pi_i(v_A)_i\}w(π)=minA​{cA​+∑i​πi​(vA​)i​} over all nnn^nnn assignments AAA.
  2. §3, Eqs. (3.1)–(3.3): www attains its maximum, and max⁡w\max wmaxw equals the cost of an optimal permutation.
  3. Eq. (3.5): if σ\sigmaσ is the unique optimal permutation, some maximizer πˉ\bar\piπˉ of www has, for every job rrr, the minimum min⁡s[asr−πˉs]\min_s[a_{sr}-\bar\pi_s]mins​[asr​−πˉs​] attained only at s=σ(r)s=\sigma(r)s=σ(r).
  4. Eq. (3.6): for an optimal permutation σ\sigmaσ, the set Π={π:air−πi>aσ(r) r−πσ(r) for all r, i≠σ(r)}\Pi=\{\pi : a_{ir}-\pi_i>a_{\sigma(r)\,r}-\pi_{\sigma(r)}\ \text{for all } r,\ i\ne\sigma(r)\}Π={π:air​−πi​>aσ(r)r​−πσ(r)​ for all r, i=σ(r)} is convex and open, v=0v=0v=0 on it, and Π⊆Ω\Pi\subseteq\OmegaΠ⊆Ω.

Significance

The theorem turns an empirical observation into a statement about the problem: finite termination of the subgradient method on assignment problems is a property of the dual, not luck. Since www is unchanged by adding the same constant to every price, Ω\OmegaΩ always contains a line; Theorem 3.1 says that, under uniqueness, it is as large as it can be. The paper (p. 70) cites the argument of its Section 2 that, with a full-dimensional optimal set, termination of the method is "nearly certain".

The result is proved in the paper; none of it is known to be machine-checked. What the formalization adds is a checked link between three classical ingredients: the integrality of the assignment polytope (Birkhoff–von Neumann, which Mathlib has as doublyStochastic_eq_convexHull_permMatrix), linear-programming duality, and strict complementary slackness, which neither Mathlib nor the platform has in the form needed. The piecewise-linear representation (3.4) is reusable wherever the assignment dual appears as a Lagrangean subproblem.

Difficulty

The inclusion Π⊆Ω\Pi\subseteq\OmegaΠ⊆Ω is elementary; the substance is that Π\PiΠ is nonempty. The obvious candidate — any optimal dual solution — fails: an optimal π\piπ may leave ties asr−πs=aσ(r) r−πσ(r)a_{sr}-\pi_s=a_{\sigma(r)\,r}-\pi_{\sigma(r)}asr​−πs​=aσ(r)r​−πσ(r)​ for some s≠σ(r)s\ne\sigma(r)s=σ(r), so it sits on the boundary of Ω\OmegaΩ and shows nothing about dimension. What is needed is an optimal price vector with all these inequalities strict at once, and uniqueness of the optimal permutation is a statement about the primal side only; transferring it to the dual side goes through the linear relaxation (3.1), whose uniqueness is not the hypothesis, and through a strict complementarity property that is not available in Mathlib or on the platform.

Formalization scope

Men and jobs are both Fin n; the costs are a : Matrix (Fin n) (Fin n) ℝ with a i r the cost of man i on job r; prices are π : Fin n → ℝ (no inner product or norm is needed, so no EuclideanSpace). The inner minimum of (3.3) is Finset.univ.inf' over the men, well defined for every n. One-to-one assignments are Equiv.Perm (Fin n) with σ r the man doing job r, so the orientation of the matrix matches (3.3); arbitrary assignments are functions Fin n → Fin n. "Of dimension nnn" is Module.finrank ℝ (vectorSpan ℝ (optSet a)) = n. The page prints the index condition of (3.6) as "i≠ri\ne ri=r"; the formalization uses i≠σ(r)i\ne\sigma(r)i=σ(r), which is what the argument requires. The case n=0n=0n=0 is allowed and trivial.

A statement asserting only that Ω\OmegaΩ is nonempty, or that it has dimension at least one, is not this theorem: both hold for every cost matrix, the second because Ω\OmegaΩ is invariant under adding a constant to all prices. The goal requires the full value nnn, and its hypothesis is uniqueness of the optimal permutation, not of the optimal linear-programming solution.

A complete development needs: the assignment linear program and its integrality (Mathlib's Birkhoff–von Neumann theorem), weak and strong duality between (3.1) and (3.2) or directly max⁡w=min⁡σcσ\max w=\min_\sigma c_\sigmamaxw=minσ​cσ​, and a strict complementarity statement for this primal–dual pair; the last two are reusable beyond this mission. Contributions of any of these, and of alternative arguments for (3.5) that avoid strict complementary slackness, are welcome.

Selected references

  • M. Held, P. Wolfe, H. P. Crowder, Validation of subgradient optimization, Mathematical Programming 6 (1974) 62–88. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01580223
  • M. Held, R. M. Karp, The traveling-salesman problem and minimum spanning trees: Part II, Mathematical Programming 1 (1971) 6–25. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01584070
  • H. W. Kuhn, The Hungarian method for the assignment problem, Naval Research Logistics Quarterly 2 (1955) 83–97. https://doi.org/10.1002/nav.3800020109
  • A. J. Goldman, A. W. Tucker, Theory of linear programming, in H. W. Kuhn, A. W. Tucker (eds.), Linear Inequalities and Related Systems, Annals of Mathematics Studies 38, Princeton University Press, 1956, 53–97.
  • Mathlib, Mathlib/Analysis/Convex/Birkhoff.lean (Birkhoff–von Neumann theorem, doublyStochastic_eq_convexHull_permMatrix). https://github.com/leanprover-community/mathlib4/blob/master/Mathlib/Analysis/Convex/Birkhoff.lean
6 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Lifts of Convex Sets and Cone Factorizations I: A Proper K-Lift of a Convex Body Yields a K-Factorization of Its Slack Operator, and a K-Factorization Yields a K-LiftResearch Paper

Motivation

Many convex sets that appear in optimization have complicated descriptions in their own space but simple descriptions as projections of higher-dimensional sets. A polytope with exponentially many facets can be the shadow of a polyhedron with polynomially many; the unit disk is the projection of a slice of the cone of 2×22\times 22×2 positive semidefinite matrices. Such a representation, a lift, turns linear optimization over the original set into a linear or semidefinite program over the lifted one, so the size of the smallest lift measures how hard the set is for conic optimization.

For polytopes and polyhedral lifts, Yannakakis (Yannakakis 1991) showed that the minimal size of a lift equals the nonnegative rank of the polytope's slack matrix. This turned questions about extended formulations into questions about matrix factorizations, and it is the basis of the lower bounds of Fiorini, Massar, Pokutta, Tiwary and de Wolf (2012) for the cut, stable set and traveling salesman polytopes. Lift-and-project hierarchies (Sherali–Adams, Lovász–Schrijver, Lasserre) all produce lifts to nonnegative orthants or positive semidefinite cones, so a criterion for the existence of a lift is also a criterion for when such a hierarchy can succeed.

Gouveia, Parrilo and Thomas (arXiv:1111.3164, Mathematics of Operations Research 38(2), 2013) extended Yannakakis' theorem from polytopes and polyhedral cones to arbitrary convex bodies and arbitrary closed convex cones. Their Theorem 2.4 is the target of this mission.

Timeline:

  • 1991, Yannakakis: polytopes, polyhedral lifts, nonnegative factorizations of the slack matrix.
  • 2012, Fiorini, Massar, Pokutta, Tiwary, de Wolf: superpolynomial lower bounds on polyhedral lifts via nonnegative rank; a positive semidefinite analogue for polytopes.
  • 2011/2013, Gouveia, Parrilo, Thomas: convex bodies and general closed convex cones (Theorem 2.4), with psd rank as the semidefinite analogue of nonnegative rank.

Setting

Throughout, Rk\mathbb R^kRk carries the Euclidean inner product ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩.

A convex body is a set C⊆RnC \subseteq \mathbb R^nC⊆Rn that is convex, compact, and contains the origin in its interior. Its polar is

C∘={ y∈Rn:⟨x,y⟩≤1 for all x∈C }.C^\circ = \{\, y \in \mathbb R^n : \langle x, y\rangle \le 1 \text{ for all } x \in C \,\}.C∘={y∈Rn:⟨x,y⟩≤1 for all x∈C}.

A point p∈Cp \in Cp∈C is an extreme point if p=(p1+p2)/2p = (p_1+p_2)/2p=(p1​+p2​)/2 with p1,p2∈Cp_1,p_2\in Cp1​,p2​∈C forces p1=p2=pp_1 = p_2 = pp1​=p2​=p; ext⁡(C)\operatorname{ext}(C)ext(C) is the set of extreme points. The slack operator of CCC is

SC:ext⁡(C)×ext⁡(C∘)→R,SC(x,y)=1−⟨x,y⟩.S_C : \operatorname{ext}(C)\times\operatorname{ext}(C^\circ) \to \mathbb R, \qquad S_C(x,y) = 1 - \langle x,y\rangle .SC​:ext(C)×ext(C∘)→R,SC​(x,y)=1−⟨x,y⟩.

It is nonnegative, and for a polytope it is the slack matrix: rows indexed by vertices, columns by facet normals.

Let K⊆RmK \subseteq \mathbb R^mK⊆Rm be a full-dimensional closed convex cone: closed, convex, closed under nonnegative scaling, with nonempty interior. Its dual is K∗={y:⟨x,y⟩≥0 ∀x∈K}K^* = \{y : \langle x,y\rangle \ge 0 \ \forall x\in K\}K∗={y:⟨x,y⟩≥0 ∀x∈K}.

  • A KKK-lift of CCC is Q=K∩LQ = K\cap LQ=K∩L, where L⊆RmL\subseteq\mathbb R^mL⊆Rm is an affine subspace and π:Rm→Rn\pi:\mathbb R^m\to\mathbb R^nπ:Rm→Rn is a linear map with C=π(K∩L)C = \pi(K\cap L)C=π(K∩L). The lift is proper if LLL meets the interior of KKK (Definition 2.1).
  • SCS_CSC​ is KKK-factorizable if there are maps, not necessarily linear, A:ext⁡(C)→KA:\operatorname{ext}(C)\to KA:ext(C)→K and B:ext⁡(C∘)→K∗B:\operatorname{ext}(C^\circ)\to K^*B:ext(C∘)→K∗ with SC(x,y)=⟨A(x),B(y)⟩S_C(x,y) = \langle A(x), B(y)\rangleSC​(x,y)=⟨A(x),B(y)⟩ for all (x,y)(x,y)(x,y) (Definition 2.2).

In Lean these are IsConvexBody, IsClosedConvexCone, HasLift, HasProperLift and SlackFactorizable in the namespace ConeLifts.Factorization, together with the series' shared ConeLifts.Shared.polar and ConeLifts.Shared.dualCone.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2.4

For n≥1n \ge 1n≥1, a convex body C⊆RnC\subseteq\mathbb R^nC⊆Rn and a full-dimensional closed convex cone K⊆RmK\subseteq\mathbb R^mK⊆Rm:

(C has a proper K-lift⇒SC is K-factorizable)  ∧  (SC is K-factorizable⇒C has a K-lift).\bigl(C \text{ has a proper } K\text{-lift} \Rightarrow S_C \text{ is } K\text{-factorizable}\bigr) \;\wedge\; \bigl(S_C \text{ is } K\text{-factorizable} \Rightarrow C \text{ has a } K\text{-lift}\bigr).(C has a proper K-lift⇒SC​ is K-factorizable)∧(SC​ is K-factorizable⇒C has a K-lift).

The two implications are not an equivalence: the forward one assumes properness, and the lift produced by the converse may be improper.

Milestones

In the order the paper's proof uses them:

  1. (§2, p. 3) C=conv⁡(ext⁡C)C = \operatorname{conv}(\operatorname{ext} C)C=conv(extC) and C∘=conv⁡(ext⁡C∘)C^\circ = \operatorname{conv}(\operatorname{ext} C^\circ)C∘=conv(extC∘).
  2. (proof, p. 4) For every c∈ext⁡(C∘)c\in\operatorname{ext}(C^\circ)c∈ext(C∘), max⁡{⟨c,x⟩:x∈C}=1\max\{\langle c,x\rangle : x\in C\} = 1max{⟨c,x⟩:x∈C}=1, attained.
  3. (proof, p. 4) If C=π(K∩L)C = \pi(K\cap L)C=π(K∩L), L=w0+L0L = w_0 + L_0L=w0​+L0​ and w0∈int⁡Kw_0\in\operatorname{int}Kw0​∈intK, then for c∈ext⁡(C∘)c \in \operatorname{ext}(C^\circ)c∈ext(C∘)
1=min⁡{⟨w0,z⟩:z−π∗(c)∈K∗, z∈L0⊥},1 = \min\{\langle w_0, z\rangle : z - \pi^*(c)\in K^*,\ z\in L_0^\perp\},1=min{⟨w0​,z⟩:z−π∗(c)∈K∗, z∈L0⊥​},

with the minimum attained. 4. (proof, p. 5) For L={(x,z):1−⟨x,y⟩=⟨z,B(y)⟩ ∀y∈ext⁡(C∘)}L = \{(x,z) : 1-\langle x,y\rangle = \langle z, B(y)\rangle\ \forall y\in\operatorname{ext}(C^\circ)\}L={(x,z):1−⟨x,y⟩=⟨z,B(y)⟩ ∀y∈ext(C∘)} and its projection LKL_KLK​ to Rm\mathbb R^mRm: 0∉LK0\notin L_K0∈/LK​. 5. (proof, p. 5) If BBB maps into K∗K^*K∗, z∈Kz\in Kz∈K and (x,z)∈L(x,z)\in L(x,z)∈L, then x∈Cx\in Cx∈C. 6. (proof, p. 5) For each z∈K∩LKz\in K\cap L_Kz∈K∩LK​ there is a unique xzx_zxz​ with (xz,z)∈L(x_z,z)\in L(xz​,z)∈L.

Significance

The result. Theorem 2.4 makes the existence of a lift of a convex body to a given cone a purely algebraic question about its slack operator. Every lower bound on lift size in the paper and its successors goes through it: the nonnegative-rank bounds for polytopes (Section 4 of the paper), the proof that the stable set polytope of an nnn-vertex graph has no lift to S+n\mathcal S^n_+S+n​ (Section 5), and the later psd-rank literature. It also puts Yannakakis' theorem and its semidefinite analogue under a single statement.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved on paper; no machine-checked version is known to exist. Formalizing it requires conic strong duality with dual attainment under a Slater condition, which Mathlib does not have, and finite-dimensional Krein–Milman for the polar body. The companion missions of this series (nonnegative-rank lower bounds; stable set polytopes and psd lifts) use the correspondence as their entry point.

Difficulty

The converse half is elementary once the extreme points of C∘C^\circC∘ are known to generate it. The forward half is not: B(c)B(c)B(c) must be an element of K∗K^*K∗ that certifies ⟨c,x⟩≤1\langle c, x\rangle \le 1⟨c,x⟩≤1 on CCC through the lift. A separating functional gives this certificate on π(K∩L)\pi(K\cap L)π(K∩L), but writing it as z−π∗(c)z - \pi^*(c)z−π∗(c) with z⊥L0z \perp L_0z⊥L0​, z−π∗(c)∈K∗z - \pi^*(c)\in K^*z−π∗(c)∈K∗ and ⟨w0,z⟩=1\langle w_0,z\rangle = 1⟨w0​,z⟩=1 exactly is conic duality with a zero gap and an attained dual optimum. For closed convex cones the gap can be positive or the dual unattained unless a constraint qualification holds; this is why properness is assumed. Weak duality alone gives only ≥1\ge 1≥1, and a dual sequence approaching 111 does not yield a factor. The paper notes (p. 5) that, since the proof uses strong duality, it is not obvious how to remove properness for a general closed convex cone.

Formalization scope

Conventions fixed by the Lean statements:

  • Rk\mathbb R^kRk is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin k); every pairing, in SSS, in K∗K^*K∗ and in the factorization, is its inner product.
  • The polar is one-sided, ⟨x,y⟩≤1\langle x,y\rangle\le 1⟨x,y⟩≤1; Mathlib's absolute polar is not used.
  • A convex body is compact, convex, with 000 in its interior. The paper's "full-dimensional convex body in Rn\mathbb R^nRn" is read as including n≥1n\ge 1n≥1: for n=0n = 0n=0, C={0}C = \{0\}C={0} has the proper Rm\mathbb R^mRm-lift {0}\{0\}{0} while SC(0,0)=1S_C(0,0) = 1SC​(0,0)=1 cannot factor through K∗={0}K^* = \{0\}K∗={0}, so the forward half is false there. The goal and milestones 2–3 assume 1≤n1\le n1≤n.
  • KKK is closed, convex, contains 000 and is closed under nonnegative scaling; full-dimensionality is (interior K).Nonempty. Pointedness is not assumed.
  • LLL is a Mathlib AffineSubspace and π\piπ a linear map; the lift condition is the set equality C=π(K∩L)C = \pi(K\cap L)C=π(K∩L).
  • A,BA, BA,B are total functions Rn→Rm\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb R^mRn→Rm constrained only on ext⁡(C)\operatorname{ext}(C)ext(C), resp. ext⁡(C∘)\operatorname{ext}(C^\circ)ext(C∘), which is equivalent to maps out of the extreme points. They are not required to be linear or continuous.
  • Milestone 3 is the second, substituted form of the paper's dual (z=MTyz = M^{\mathsf T}yz=MTy), stated with L.directionᗮ and LinearMap.adjoint π; minima and maxima are stated with IsLeast/IsGreatest, so attainment is part of every claim.

Trivializing readings are excluded: π\piπ is linear, not an arbitrary function (with an arbitrary function every set is a "lift"); LLL is an affine subspace, not an arbitrary set; and BBB takes values in K∗K^*K∗, not KKK, which for a cone that is not self-dual would be a different and generally false statement.

Needed infrastructure: finite-dimensional Krein–Milman in the form C=conv⁡(ext⁡C)C = \operatorname{conv}(\operatorname{ext} C)C=conv(extC) for compact convex sets (Mathlib has the closure form); the bipolar theorem (C∘)∘=C(C^\circ)^\circ = C(C∘)∘=C for closed convex C∋0C\ni 0C∋0 with the one-sided polar; compactness of C∘C^\circC∘ when 0∈int⁡C0\in\operatorname{int} C0∈intC; and conic linear programming duality with a Slater point, including dual attainment. The last two are reusable well beyond this mission. Proofs of individual milestones, and of these general facts as separate lemmas, are welcome.

Selected references

  • J. Gouveia, P. A. Parrilo, R. R. Thomas, Lifts of Convex Sets and Cone Factorizations, Mathematics of Operations Research 38(2):248–264, 2013. arXiv:1111.3164v2, doi:10.1287/moor.1120.0575
  • M. Yannakakis, Expressing combinatorial optimization problems by linear programs, Journal of Computer and System Sciences 43(3):441–466, 1991. doi:10.1016/0022-0000(91)90024-Y
  • S. Fiorini, S. Massar, S. Pokutta, H. R. Tiwary, R. de Wolf, Linear vs. semidefinite extended formulations: exponential separation and strong lower bounds, STOC 2012. arXiv:1111.0837
14 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationLinear algebraNumerical Analysis+1·Captain: mikedeng1

Robust Solutions to Least-Squares Problems with Uncertain Data III: Structured Robust Least Squares Is Solved Exactly by a Semidefinite ProgramResearch Paper

Motivation

Least squares fits a model Ax≈bAx \approx bAx≈b as if the data (A,b)(A, b)(A,b) were exact. In practice they are measured, rounded or estimated, and the least-squares solution can be very sensitive to such errors. El Ghaoui and Lebret (SIAM J. Matrix Anal. Appl. 18(4), 1997) proposed to treat the errors as deterministic, unknown but bounded, and to choose xxx minimizing the worst-case residual over all admissible data. For unstructured perturbations of [A b][A\ b][A b] bounded in Frobenius norm this leads to a second-order cone program (missions I and II of this series).

In many applications the perturbations have a known structure: a Toeplitz matrix stays Toeplitz, a parameter enters several entries at once, or only some entries are uncertain. An unstructured bound then over-estimates the worst case. The paper's §4 treats perturbations that are affine in a parameter vector δ\deltaδ bounded in Euclidean norm, and shows that the resulting structured robust least-squares (SRLS) problem is still solved exactly, now by a semidefinite program (SDP). This model of uncertainty (an ellipsoid of affinely parametrized data) is the one later adopted as the basic uncertainty set of robust optimization; see Ben-Tal and Nemirovski, Math. Oper. Res. 23(4), 1998.

Setting

Vectors carry the Euclidean norm ∥v∥=vTv\|v\| = \sqrt{v^Tv}∥v∥=vTv​. Given matrices A0,A1,…,Ap∈Rn×mA_0, A_1, \dots, A_p \in \mathbb{R}^{n\times m}A0​,A1​,…,Ap​∈Rn×m and vectors b0,b1,…,bp∈Rnb_0, b_1, \dots, b_p \in \mathbb{R}^nb0​,b1​,…,bp​∈Rn, define for every δ∈Rp\delta \in \mathbb{R}^pδ∈Rp

A(δ)=A0+∑i=1pδiAi,b(δ)=b0+∑i=1pδibi.\mathbf A(\delta) = A_0 + \sum_{i=1}^p \delta_i A_i, \qquad \mathbf b(\delta) = b_0 + \sum_{i=1}^p \delta_i b_i .A(δ)=A0​+i=1∑p​δi​Ai​,b(δ)=b0​+i=1∑p​δi​bi​.

For ρ≥0\rho \ge 0ρ≥0 and x∈Rmx \in \mathbb{R}^mx∈Rm the structured worst-case residual is

rS(A,b,ρ,x)=max⁡∥δ∥≤ρ∥A(δ)x−b(δ)∥,r_S(\mathbf A, \mathbf b, \rho, x) = \max_{\|\delta\| \le \rho} \|\mathbf A(\delta)x - \mathbf b(\delta)\|,rS​(A,b,ρ,x)=∥δ∥≤ρmax​∥A(δ)x−b(δ)∥,

and xxx is an SRLS solution if it minimizes rS(A,b,ρ,⋅)r_S(\mathbf A, \mathbf b, \rho, \cdot)rS​(A,b,ρ,⋅) over Rm\mathbb{R}^mRm. The paper takes ρ=1\rho = 1ρ=1 throughout §4 and writes rS(A,b,x)r_S(\mathbf A, \mathbf b, x)rS​(A,b,x).

For fixed xxx let M(x)=[A1x−b1 ⋯ Apx−bp]∈Rn×pM(x) = [A_1x - b_1\ \cdots\ A_px - b_p] \in \mathbb{R}^{n\times p}M(x)=[A1​x−b1​ ⋯ Ap​x−bp​]∈Rn×p and

F=M(x)TM(x),g=M(x)T(A0x−b0),h=∥A0x−b0∥2.F = M(x)^TM(x), \qquad g = M(x)^T(A_0x - b_0), \qquad h = \|A_0x - b_0\|^2 .F=M(x)TM(x),g=M(x)T(A0​x−b0​),h=∥A0​x−b0​∥2.

Since A(δ)x−b(δ)=(A0x−b0)+M(x)δ\mathbf A(\delta)x - \mathbf b(\delta) = (A_0x - b_0) + M(x)\deltaA(δ)x−b(δ)=(A0​x−b0​)+M(x)δ, the squared residual at δ\deltaδ is the quadratic function h+2gTδ+δTFδh + 2g^T\delta + \delta^TF\deltah+2gTδ+δTFδ. Finally, for scalars λ,τ\lambda, \tauλ,τ,

F(λ,τ)=[λ−τ−h−gT−gτI−F].\mathcal F(\lambda, \tau) = \begin{bmatrix} \lambda - \tau - h & -g^T \\ -g & \tau I - F \end{bmatrix}.F(λ,τ)=[λ−τ−h−g​−gTτI−F​].

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.2

With p≥1p \ge 1p≥1 and ρ=1\rho = 1ρ=1, consider the SDP in (λ,τ,x)(\lambda, \tau, x)(λ,τ,x)

minimize λsubject to[λ−τ0(A0x−b0)T0τIM(x)TA0x−b0M(x)I]⪰0.(32)\text{minimize } \lambda \quad \text{subject to} \quad \begin{bmatrix} \lambda - \tau & 0 & (A_0x - b_0)^T \\ 0 & \tau I & M(x)^T \\ A_0x - b_0 & M(x) & I \end{bmatrix} \succeq 0. \tag{32}minimize λsubject to​λ−τ0A0​x−b0​​0τIM(x)​(A0​x−b0​)TM(x)TI​​⪰0.(32)

The goal states that (a) for all xxx and λ\lambdaλ, some τ\tauτ makes (λ,τ,x)(\lambda, \tau, x)(λ,τ,x) feasible if and only if rS(A,b,x)2≤λr_S(\mathbf A, \mathbf b, x)^2 \le \lambdarS​(A,b,x)2≤λ; and (b) (λ,τ,x)(\lambda, \tau, x)(λ,τ,x) is optimal for (32) if and only if xxx is an SRLS solution, λ=rS(A,b,x)2\lambda = r_S(\mathbf A, \mathbf b, x)^2λ=rS​(A,b,x)2, and (λ,τ,x)(\lambda, \tau, x)(λ,τ,x) is feasible. This is the precise content of the paper's "the SRLS can be solved by computing an optimal solution of (32)".

Milestones

  1. Lemma 2.1 (S-procedure), in two items: the multiplier condition is sufficient for every ppp; for p=1p = 1p=1 it is also necessary when F1(ζ0)>0F_1(\zeta_0) > 0F1​(ζ0​)>0 for some ζ0\zeta_0ζ0​.
  2. Eq. (28): rS(A,b,x)2=max⁡δTδ≤1[1;δ]T[hgTgF][1;δ]r_S(\mathbf A, \mathbf b, x)^2 = \max_{\delta^T\delta \le 1} [1;\delta]^T \begin{bmatrix} h & g^T \\ g & F\end{bmatrix} [1;\delta]rS​(A,b,x)2=maxδTδ≤1​[1;δ]T[hg​gTF​][1;δ].
  3. Eq. (29): for λ≥0\lambda \ge 0λ≥0, that quadratic form is ≤λ\le \lambda≤λ on the unit ball if and only if F(λ,τ)⪰0\mathcal F(\lambda, \tau) \succeq 0F(λ,τ)⪰0 for some τ\tauτ.
  4. Theorem 4.1, first assertion: rS(A,b,x)2=min⁡{λ:∃τ, F(λ,τ)⪰0}r_S(\mathbf A, \mathbf b, x)^2 = \min\{\lambda : \exists \tau,\ \mathcal F(\lambda, \tau) \succeq 0\}rS​(A,b,x)2=min{λ:∃τ, F(λ,τ)⪰0}, the minimum attained.
  5. §4.2, Schur-complement step: the matrix of (32) is positive semidefinite if and only if F(λ,τ)\mathcal F(\lambda, \tau)F(λ,τ) is.

Significance

The result shows that a min–max problem over a nonconvex worst case (the inner problem maximizes a convex quadratic over a ball) is equivalent to a single convex SDP whose size is linear in nnn, mmm and ppp, and hence solvable in polynomial time by interior-point methods. It covers as special cases the unstructured problem of §3, least squares with uncertainty in selected entries, and Toeplitz or otherwise patterned perturbations. The exactness contrasts with the next section of the paper, where the linear-fractional and ℓ∞\ell_\inftyℓ∞​-bounded versions are in general only bounded from above, or shown NP-hard.

The result is proved in the paper; to the best of current knowledge it has not been formalized. The platform already has the one-constraint S-procedure (ConvexOptimization.s_procedure, proved, in a different sign and block convention); this mission adds the robust least-squares objects, the reduction to the S-procedure, the Schur-complement step, and the optimal-solution correspondence of Theorem 4.2. The worst-case residual and SDP (32) definitions are reusable by later robust-regression missions.

Difficulty

The obvious approach is to compute the inner maximum directly. The function δ↦h+2gTδ+δTFδ\delta \mapsto h + 2g^T\delta + \delta^TF\deltaδ↦h+2gTδ+δTFδ is convex, so its maximum over the unit ball is attained on the boundary, but it is not given by any closed-form expression in general, and maximizing a convex function is not a convex problem. Exactness therefore rests on the lossless S-procedure for one quadratic constraint, a nonconvex duality statement that fails for two or more constraints; the sufficient direction alone only yields an upper bound.

A second point is passing from "for fixed xxx" (Theorem 4.1) to "optimal over xxx" (Theorem 4.2): F(λ,τ)\mathcal F(\lambda, \tau)F(λ,τ) is quadratic in xxx, and only the Schur-complement lift (32) is jointly affine in (λ,τ,x)(\lambda, \tau, x)(λ,τ,x). The correspondence of optimal solutions must then be checked in both directions, including that the optimal λ\lambdaλ is the squared residual and not the residual.

Formalization scope

  • Data are A0 : Matrix (Fin n) (Fin m) ℝ, A : Fin p → Matrix (Fin n) (Fin m) ℝ, b0 : Fin n → ℝ, b : Fin p → Fin n → ℝ; A i is the paper's Ai+1A_{i+1}Ai+1​ (0-based index). Vectors live in Fin k → ℝ with the Euclidean norm written out as ∑ivi2\sqrt{\sum_i v_i^2}∑i​vi2​​, never Mathlib's sup norm.
  • The maximum defining rSr_SrS​ is sSup of the set of attained residuals over the closed ball; for ρ≥0\rho \ge 0ρ≥0 this set is nonempty and bounded, so sSup is the true maximum. The theorems use ρ=1\rho = 1ρ=1, as the paper does; the paper derives general ρ\rhoρ by scaling and that is not stated here.
  • Block matrices are Matrix.fromBlocks in the printed order (scalar block first: Unit ⊕ Fin p; for (32), (Unit ⊕ Fin p) ⊕ Fin n). "⪰0\succeq 0⪰0" is Mathlib's PosSemidef, which includes symmetry; all matrices here are symmetric by construction.
  • p≥1p \ge 1p≥1 is assumed in (29), Theorem 4.1 and Theorem 4.2, although the paper does not state it: for p=0p = 0p=0 the block τI\tau IτI is empty, τ\tauτ is unconstrained, every λ\lambdaλ is feasible and both SDPs lose their meaning. Eq. (28), Lemma 2.1 and the Schur-complement step hold for every ppp and are stated without it.
  • Optimality in (32) is stated as feasibility plus λ≤λ′\lambda \le \lambda'λ≤λ′ for every feasible (λ′,τ′,x′)(\lambda', \tau', x')(λ′,τ′,x′). A formalization that only proves existence of some feasible τ\tauτ, or only an inequality between the optimal values, is weaker than Theorem 4.2 and does not close the goal.
  • Theorem 4.1's second and third assertions (the one-dimensional reformulation (30)–(31) and the worst-case perturbation) are not included: they use the notion "(F,g)(F, g)(F,g)-controllable", which the paper does not define.
  • Useful infrastructure: Mathlib's Schur-complement lemmas (Matrix.PosSemidef.fromBlocks₂₂ and relatives in LinearAlgebra.Matrix.SchurComplement); the platform's ConvexOptimization.s_procedure and ConvexOptimization.single_constraint_quadratic_strong_duality with their definitions ConvexOptimization_quadraticForms, included as reference items. A bridge lemma between the platform's block convention and this mission's is a welcome contribution, as is a general-ρ\rhoρ version.

Selected references

  • L. El Ghaoui and H. Lebret, Robust Solutions to Least-Squares Problems with Uncertain Data, SIAM J. Matrix Anal. Appl. 18(4):1035–1064, 1997. https://doi.org/10.1137/S0895479896298130
  • S. Boyd, L. El Ghaoui, E. Feron and V. Balakrishnan, Linear Matrix Inequalities in System and Control Theory, SIAM, 1994 (the S-procedure, p. 24). https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611970777
  • A. Ben-Tal and A. Nemirovski, Robust Convex Optimization, Math. Oper. Res. 23(4):769–805, 1998. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.23.4.769
  • I. Pólik and T. Terlaky, A Survey of the S-Lemma, SIAM Review 49(3):371–418, 2007. https://doi.org/10.1137/S003614450444614X
11 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationLinear algebraNumerical Analysis+1·Captain: mikedeng1

Robust Solutions to Least-Squares Problems with Uncertain Data I: The Worst-Case Residual and Its Unique MinimizerResearch Paper

Motivation

The least-squares (LS) problem min⁡x∥Ax−b∥\min_x \|Ax - b\|minx​∥Ax−b∥ assumes that the data A∈Rn×mA \in \mathbb{R}^{n\times m}A∈Rn×m, b∈Rnb \in \mathbb{R}^nb∈Rn are exact. In applications they rarely are: they come from measurements, from linearizations, or from models with neglected dynamics. A classical response is sensitivity analysis or regularization (Tikhonov), where a weight trades the size of the solution against the fit, and the choice of that weight is left to the user. El Ghaoui and Lebret (SIAM J. Matrix Anal. Appl. 18(4), 1997) take a deterministic view instead: the true data lie in a known ball around (A,b)(A, b)(A,b), and the solution should minimize the residual it can be forced to have in the worst case over that ball. The paper shows that this robust least-squares (RLS) problem is solvable exactly, in the unstructured case by a second-order cone program (SOCP). The same worst-case idea, applied to regression, underlies the later equivalence between robustness and regularization (Xu, Caramanis and Mannor, 2009) and is a standard entry point to robust optimization (Ben-Tal, El Ghaoui and Nemirovski, Robust Optimization, 2009).

This mission formalizes the first main result of the paper, Theorem 3.1: the worst-case residual has a closed form, its minimizer is unique, and minimizing it is an SOCP.

Setting

Vectors carry the Euclidean norm ∥v∥=(∑ivi2)1/2\|v\| = (\sum_i v_i^2)^{1/2}∥v∥=(∑i​vi2​)1/2. For a matrix XXX, ∥X∥F=(∑i,jXij2)1/2\|X\|_F = (\sum_{i,j} X_{ij}^2)^{1/2}∥X∥F​=(∑i,j​Xij2​)1/2 is the Frobenius norm and ∥X∥\|X\|∥X∥ the largest singular value, i.e. the smallest c≥0c \ge 0c≥0 with ∥Xv∥≤c∥v∥\|Xv\| \le c\|v\|∥Xv∥≤c∥v∥ for all vvv.

Fix A∈Rn×mA \in \mathbb{R}^{n\times m}A∈Rn×m and b∈Rnb \in \mathbb{R}^nb∈Rn. A perturbation is a pair ΔA∈Rn×m\Delta A \in \mathbb{R}^{n\times m}ΔA∈Rn×m, Δb∈Rn\Delta b \in \mathbb{R}^nΔb∈Rn, collected in the augmented matrix Δ=[ΔA Δb]∈Rn×(m+1)\Delta = [\Delta A\ \Delta b] \in \mathbb{R}^{n\times(m+1)}Δ=[ΔA Δb]∈Rn×(m+1). For a bound ρ≥0\rho \ge 0ρ≥0 and x∈Rmx \in \mathbb{R}^mx∈Rm, the worst-case residual is (paper, eq. (1))

r(A,b,ρ,x)=max⁡∥[ΔA Δb]∥F≤ρ∥(A+ΔA)x−(b+Δb)∥,r(A,b,\rho,x) = \max_{\|[\Delta A\ \Delta b]\|_F \le \rho} \|(A+\Delta A)x - (b+\Delta b)\|,r(A,b,ρ,x)=∥[ΔA Δb]∥F​≤ρmax​∥(A+ΔA)x−(b+Δb)∥,

and xxx is an RLS solution if it minimizes r(A,b,ρ,⋅)r(A,b,\rho,\cdot)r(A,b,ρ,⋅). The bound constrains the augmented matrix jointly, not ΔA\Delta AΔA and Δb\Delta bΔb separately. The paper normalizes ρ=1\rho = 1ρ=1 and writes r(A,b,x)=r(A,b,1,x)r(A,b,x) = r(A,b,1,x)r(A,b,x)=r(A,b,1,x). Finally, [x;1]∈Rm+1[x;1] \in \mathbb{R}^{m+1}[x;1]∈Rm+1 denotes xxx stacked over 111. In the Lean development these are RobustLS.Unstructured.eucNorm, frobNorm, specNorm, augment, stackOne, worstCaseResidual A b ρ x, its largest-singular-value variant worstCaseResidualSpec, and the SOCP constraint predicate SocpFeasible A b x λ τ.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.1 (p. 1040)

For n≥1n \ge 1n≥1, every AAA, bbb:

r(A,b,x)=∥Ax−b∥+∥x∥2+1for all x∈Rm,r(A,b,x) = \|Ax-b\| + \sqrt{\|x\|^2+1} \quad \text{for all } x \in \mathbb{R}^m,r(A,b,x)=∥Ax−b∥+∥x∥2+1​for all x∈Rm,

the problem min⁡x∈Rmr(A,b,x)\min_{x \in \mathbb{R}^m} r(A,b,x)minx∈Rm​r(A,b,x) has exactly one solution xRLSx_{\mathrm{RLS}}xRLS​, and it is the SOCP

minimize λsubject to∥Ax−b∥≤λ−τ,∥[x;1]∥≤τ,(15)\text{minimize } \lambda \quad\text{subject to}\quad \|Ax-b\| \le \lambda-\tau,\quad \|[x;1]\| \le \tau, \tag{15}minimize λsubject to∥Ax−b∥≤λ−τ,∥[x;1]∥≤τ,(15)

in the sense that r(A,b,x)r(A,b,x)r(A,b,x) is the least λ\lambdaλ for which some τ\tauτ makes (x,λ,τ)(x,\lambda,\tau)(x,λ,τ) feasible.

Milestones

  1. Eq. (16). Every perturbation with ∥[ΔA Δb]∥F≤1\|[\Delta A\ \Delta b]\|_F \le 1∥[ΔA Δb]∥F​≤1 has residual at most ∥Ax−b∥+∥x∥2+1\|Ax-b\| + \sqrt{\|x\|^2+1}∥Ax−b∥+∥x∥2+1​.
  2. The worst-case perturbation. For a unit vector uuu aligned with Ax−bAx - bAx−b (arbitrary if Ax=bAx = bAx=b), the rank-one matrix Δ=u[xT −1]/∥x∥2+1\Delta = u[x^T\ {-1}]/\sqrt{\|x\|^2+1}Δ=u[xT −1]/∥x∥2+1​ has ∥Δ∥F=∥Δ∥=1\|\Delta\|_F = \|\Delta\| = 1∥Δ∥F​=∥Δ∥=1 and attains the bound.
  3. Spectral norm. The worst case over the larger ball ∥[ΔA Δb]∥≤1\|[\Delta A\ \Delta b]\| \le 1∥[ΔA Δb]∥≤1 is the same value.
  4. Strict convexity. x↦r(A,b,x)x \mapsto r(A,b,x)x↦r(A,b,x) is strictly convex on Rm\mathbb{R}^mRm.
  5. The SOCP (15). For every xxx, r(A,b,x)r(A,b,x)r(A,b,x) is the optimal λ\lambdaλ of (15) with xxx fixed, and xxx is an RLS solution exactly when it is the xxx-part of an optimal solution of (15).

Significance

The closed form replaces a maximization over a matrix ball of dimension n(m+1)n(m+1)n(m+1) by two Euclidean norms. It shows that the RLS objective is the LS residual plus a penalty ∥x∥2+1\sqrt{\|x\|^2+1}∥x∥2+1​ that does not depend on AAA or bbb, which is the starting point for the paper's Theorem 3.2 (the RLS solution is a Tikhonov-regularized LS solution with a data-dependent weight) and its analysis of continuity and conditioning. The SOCP formulation places the problem in the class solved by interior-point methods, at a cost the paper compares with one singular value decomposition of AAA. The spectral-norm statement says the worst case does not depend on which of the two standard matrix norms bounds the perturbation.

The result is proved in the paper; the proof is short. To the best of the planning survey (September 2026), no machine-checked proof exists, and Prove2Me has no statement about worst-case residuals or robust least squares. The mission produces a verified closed form that later missions of this series (Tikhonov form of the solution, structured and linear-fractional perturbations) and any formalization of robust regression can import.

Difficulty

The upper bound alone does not give the theorem: the statement is an equality, and the equality needs an explicit maximizer. The paper's printed maximizer is wrong by a sign: with [xT 1][x^T\ 1][xT 1] in place of [xT −1][x^T\ {-1}][xT −1] the perturbation does not attain the bound (for A=0A = 0A=0, x=0x = 0x=0, b=e1b = e_1b=e1​ it gives residual 000 instead of 222), so a transcription of the printed proof fails. Two further points are silent in the paper. The operator norm of a rank-one matrix has to be computed from the definition of the largest singular value. Uniqueness of the minimizer needs existence first, which follows from growth of rrr at infinity and is not stated. Working with the sSup definition of the worst case requires showing the set of residuals is bounded, which is milestone 1.

Formalization scope

  • Dimensions are Fin n, Fin m; AAA is Matrix (Fin n) (Fin m) ℝ, bbb and xxx are functions Fin n → ℝ, Fin m → ℝ. The augmented matrix [ΔA Δb][\Delta A\ \Delta b][ΔA Δb] is indexed by Fin m ⊕ Unit, and so is [x;1][x;1][x;1].
  • Vector norms are the Euclidean norm written as ∑ivi2\sqrt{\sum_i v_i^2}∑i​vi2​​ (eucNorm), never Mathlib's ‖·‖ on Fin n → ℝ, which is the sup norm. The Frobenius norm and the largest singular value are explicit definitions (frobNorm, specNorm); specNorm is the infimum of admissible operator constants.
  • The maximum in (1) is sSup of the set of attained residuals. For ρ≥0\rho \ge 0ρ≥0 the set is nonempty and bounded, so this is the true maximum; milestones 1 and 2 state the bound and the attaining perturbation directly, so no statement relies on the value of sSup on an unbounded set.
  • The paper's normalization ρ=1\rho = 1ρ=1 is kept; general ρ>0\rho > 0ρ>0 follows from the scaling ϕ(A,b,ρ)=ρ ϕ(A/ρ,b/ρ,1)\phi(A,b,\rho) = \rho\,\phi(A/\rho,b/\rho,1)ϕ(A,b,ρ)=ρϕ(A/ρ,b/ρ,1) the paper records on p. 1039 and is not a target.
  • The goal assumes n≥1n \ge 1n≥1. For n=0n = 0n=0 the only perturbation is the empty matrix, the worst case is 000, and the closed form fails; the paper's setting (Ax≃bAx \simeq bAx≃b with data b∈Rnb \in \mathbb{R}^nb∈Rn) has n≥1n \ge 1n≥1. Milestones 3–5 carry the same hypothesis.
  • Milestone 2 states the corrected perturbation [xT −1][x^T\ {-1}][xT −1]; the printed [xT 1][x^T\ 1][xT 1] is false.
  • A trivializing formalization — an upper bound in place of the equality, a worst case over ΔA\Delta AΔA and Δb\Delta bΔb bounded separately, or uniqueness among critical points only — is ruled out: the goal is the equality for the jointly bounded augmented matrix and ∃! of a global minimizer over all of Rm\mathbb{R}^mRm.

Contributions welcome: lemmas on Frobenius and operator norms of rank-one matrices, the inequality ∥Mz∥≤∥M∥F∥z∥\|Mz\| \le \|M\|_F\|z\|∥Mz∥≤∥M∥F​∥z∥ in this explicit setting, and strict convexity of x↦∥x∥2+1x \mapsto \sqrt{\|x\|^2+1}x↦∥x∥2+1​; these are reusable beyond the mission.

Selected references

  • L. El Ghaoui and H. Lebret, Robust Solutions to Least-Squares Problems with Uncertain Data, SIAM Journal on Matrix Analysis and Applications 18(4):1035–1064, 1997. https://doi.org/10.1137/S0895479896298130
  • A. Ben-Tal, L. El Ghaoui and A. Nemirovski, Robust Optimization, Princeton University Press, 2009. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400831050
  • H. Xu, C. Caramanis and S. Mannor, Robust Regression and Lasso, Journal of Machine Learning Research 10:1485–1510, 2009 (IEEE Trans. Inf. Theory 56(7), 2010). https://jmlr.org/papers/v10/xu09b.html
  • M. S. Lobo, L. Vandenberghe, S. Boyd and H. Lebret, Applications of Second-Order Cone Programming, Linear Algebra and its Applications 284:193–228, 1998. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0024-3795(98)10032-0
7 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
ProbabilityTheoretical Computer Science·Captain: mikedeng1

Competitive Paging Algorithms III: No Randomized Paging Algorithm Is Better than H_k-CompetitiveResearch Paper

Motivation

Paging is the problem of managing a two-level memory: a cache holds kkk of the nnn pages a program uses, every request must find its page in the cache, and a request to a page outside the cache (a page fault) forces the algorithm to bring the page in and evict another. An on-line algorithm chooses what to evict without seeing future requests. Sleator and Tarjan (CACM 1985) measured on-line paging algorithms against the optimal off-line algorithm, which knows the whole request sequence, and showed that no deterministic on-line algorithm can be within a factor smaller than kkk of it.

Randomization changes that picture. Fiat, Karp, Luby, McGeoch, Sleator and Young (J. Algorithms 1991; arXiv:cs/0205038) gave a randomized algorithm, the marking algorithm, whose expected number of faults is within 2Hk2H_k2Hk​ of the optimum, where Hk=1+12+⋯+1k≈ln⁡kH_k = 1 + \tfrac12 + \dots + \tfrac1k \approx \ln kHk​=1+21​+⋯+k1​≈lnk. This mission formalizes the other half of their paper's picture: no randomized paging algorithm can do better than HkH_kHk​. The bound says that the logarithmic behaviour is not an artefact of one algorithm but a property of the problem.

Timeline:

  • 1985 — Sleator and Tarjan: deterministic paging algorithms have competitive factor at least kkk; LRU and FIFO achieve kkk.
  • 1988 — Karlin, Manasse, Rudolph and Sleator (Algorithmica 3, 1988) introduce the term competitive; Manasse, McGeoch and Sleator (STOC 1988; J. Algorithms 1990) extend it to randomized algorithms and pose the kkk-server problem, of which paging is the uniform-metric case.
  • 1991 — Fiat et al.: the marking algorithm is 2Hk2H_k2Hk​-competitive, and no randomized algorithm is better than HkH_kHk​-competitive (Theorem 4 and Corollary 5 of the paper). Raghavan gave an alternative proof of the lower bound through Yao's minimax principle.
  • 1991 — McGeoch and Sleator give an HkH_kHk​-competitive randomized paging algorithm (Algorithmica 6, 1991), so the lower bound is tight.

Setting

Let MMM be a set of nnn vertices with the uniform metric: any two distinct vertices are at distance 111. A configuration of kkk servers is a map C:{1,…,k}→MC : \{1,\dots,k\} \to MC:{1,…,k}→M; server sss sits at C(s)C(s)C(s), and a vertex is covered when some server sits on it. A request sequence σ\sigmaσ is a finite list of vertices. A deterministic on-line algorithm assigns to every prefix of requests the configuration after serving it, in such a way that the vertex just requested is covered; its cost on σ\sigmaσ is the total distance travelled by its servers, which on the uniform metric is the number of server moves. Paging with kkk cache slots and nnn pages is exactly this kkk-server problem on nnn uniform vertices.

The optimal off-line cost OPTC0(σ)\mathrm{OPT}_{C_0}(\sigma)OPTC0​​(σ) is the least cost of any schedule of configurations that starts at C0C_0C0​ and covers each request of σ\sigmaσ in turn.

A randomized on-line algorithm AAA is a probability space (Ω,μ)(\Omega,\mu)(Ω,μ) of coin outcomes together with a deterministic on-line algorithm AωA_\omegaAω​ for each outcome ω\omegaω. Its expected cost CA(σ)C_A(\sigma)CA​(σ) is the average of the cost of AωA_\omegaAω​ on σ\sigmaσ over ω\omegaω. The request sequence is fixed in advance and does not depend on the coins (an oblivious adversary). Following the paper, AAA is ccc-competitive from the initial configuration C0C_0C0​ if there is a constant aaa such that

CA(σ)  ≤  c⋅OPTC0(σ)+afor every request sequence σ.C_A(\sigma) \;\le\; c \cdot \mathrm{OPT}_{C_0}(\sigma) + a \qquad \text{for every request sequence } \sigma .CA​(σ)≤c⋅OPTC0​​(σ)+afor every request sequence σ.

For the lower-bound argument, the probability vector p=(pi)i∈Mp=(p_i)_{i\in M}p=(pi​)i∈M​ after a prefix σ\sigmaσ has pip_ipi​ equal to the probability, over ω\omegaω, that vertex iii is not covered by AωA_\omegaAω​ after serving σ\sigmaσ. A set SSS of marked vertices and the number u=n−∣S∣u = n - |S|u=n−∣S∣ of unmarked vertices are bookkeeping of the adversary, updated as the marking algorithm would update them.

Formalization targets

Goal: Corollary 5

For 1≤k≤n−11 \le k \le n-11≤k≤n−1, every randomized on-line algorithm AAA with kkk servers on nnn uniform vertices, every initial configuration C0C_0C0​ and every real ccc,

c<Hk  ⟹  A is not c-competitive from C0.c < H_k \;\Longrightarrow\; A \text{ is not } c\text{-competitive from } C_0 .c<Hk​⟹A is not c-competitive from C0​.

Theorem 4 (milestone)

The case k=n−1k = n-1k=n−1: no randomized algorithm for the uniform (n−1)(n-1)(n−1)-server problem on nnn vertices is ccc-competitive with c<Hn−1c < H_{n-1}c<Hn−1​.

Claims of the proof of Theorem 4 (milestones)

With ppp the probability vector, SSS the marked set, P=∑i∈SpiP = \sum_{i\in S} p_iP=∑i∈S​pi​ and u=n−∣S∣u = n - |S|u=n−∣S∣:

∑ipi=1(servers on distinct vertices),CA(σ i)≥CA(σ)+pi,\sum_i p_i = 1 \quad(\text{servers on distinct vertices}),\qquad C_A(\sigma\,i) \ge C_A(\sigma) + p_i,i∑​pi​=1(servers on distinct vertices),CA​(σi)≥CA​(σ)+pi​, P=0⇒∃ i∉S, pi≥1u,P>ϵ>0⇒max⁡j∈Spj≥ϵ∣S∣>0,P = 0 \Rightarrow \exists\, i\notin S,\ p_i \ge \tfrac1u, \qquad P > \epsilon > 0 \Rightarrow \max_{j\in S} p_j \ge \tfrac{\epsilon}{|S|} > 0,P=0⇒∃i∈/S, pi​≥u1​,P>ϵ>0⇒j∈Smax​pj​≥∣S∣ϵ​>0, pj=max⁡j′∉Spj′⇒pj≥1−Pu,P≤ϵ⇒ϵ+pj≥ϵ+1−Pu≥ϵ+1−ϵu≥1u.p_j = \max_{j'\notin S} p_{j'} \Rightarrow p_j \ge \tfrac{1-P}{u}, \qquad P \le \epsilon \Rightarrow \epsilon + p_j \ge \epsilon + \tfrac{1-P}{u} \ge \epsilon + \tfrac{1-\epsilon}{u} \ge \tfrac1u .pj​=j′∈/Smax​pj′​⇒pj​≥u1−P​,P≤ϵ⇒ϵ+pj​≥ϵ+u1−P​≥ϵ+u1−ϵ​≥u1​.

Significance

The result. Together with the marking algorithm's 2Hk2H_k2Hk​ upper bound, the corollary pins the randomized competitive ratio of paging to Θ(log⁡k)\Theta(\log k)Θ(logk), an exponential improvement over the deterministic ratio kkk that no randomized algorithm can push below HkH_kHk​. For k=n−1k = n-1k=n−1 the marking algorithm itself is Hn−1H_{n-1}Hn−1​-competitive, so Theorem 4 makes it optimal there. The HkH_kHk​ bound is the benchmark every later randomized paging algorithm is measured against, including the HkH_kHk​-competitive algorithm of McGeoch and Sleator, and it is the uniform-metric base case of the randomized kkk-server conjecture.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved and classical; no machine-checked proof is known to exist. The platform already has the deterministic bound (KServer.uniform_not_competitive_below_k, ratio kkk) and a formal Yao averaging principle for randomized kkk-server algorithms (KServer.randomized_yao_averaging), but no randomized paging lower bound. This mission produces the first formal HkH_kHk​ lower bound, stated against the published randomized kkk-server model, and a formal version of the paper's adversary argument. Either route — the paper's adaptive construction of a nemesis sequence from the probability vector, or Raghavan's distributional argument through Yao's principle — is welcome.

Difficulty

The adversary may not look at the coins, yet it must build one fixed sequence against which the expected cost is high in every phase. Requesting an uncovered vertex is not available, since which vertex is uncovered depends on the coins; requesting the vertex with the largest uncovered probability gives only 1/n1/n1/n per request and loses the harmonic sum. Lifting the per-phase bound to the asymptotic statement also requires handling the additive constant aaa, the initial configuration of the off-line algorithm, and, for Corollary 5, the reduction from nnn vertices to k+1k+1k+1 of them for an algorithm that may still place servers on the others.

Formalization scope

The Lean development reuses the published definitions KServer_model (configurations Fin k → M, deterministic on-line algorithms as functions of the request prefix, offlineCost) and KServer_randomized (RandomizedAlgorithm: a probability measure on coin outcomes, a deterministic algorithm per outcome, measurable costs; expCost as a lower Lebesgue integral in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]; IsCompetitiveFrom C₀ c: every drawn algorithm starts at C0C_0C0​ and there is one constant aaa, fixed before the sequence, with expCost σ ≤ ENNReal.ofReal (c * offlineCost C₀ σ + a)). The clamp at 000 in ENNReal.ofReal only weakens the property the goal refutes. The vertex set is an abstract type MMM with an equivalence Fin n ≃ M and the uniform metric as a hypothesis, never the line metric of Fin n. HkH_kHk​ is Mathlib's harmonic k cast to R\mathbb RR. The goal quantifies over every algorithm and every initial configuration, with no laziness or distinct-positions assumption, and over every real c<Hkc < H_kc<Hk​, including c≤0c \le 0c≤0.

A formalization in which competitiveness is vacuous (a model with no algorithms, or a cost that is always infinite), in which the adversary may choose the sequence after seeing the coins, or which fixes ccc or the additive constant, would be a different statement and is ruled out by the published definitions used here.

The probability vector is the one new definition, uncoveredProb A σ i. Milestones about it assume the uncovered events measurable, the standing convention that pip_ipi​ is a probability; the model itself only guarantees measurable costs. The milestone ∑ipi=1\sum_i p_i = 1∑i​pi​=1 assumes the n−1n-1n−1 servers occupy distinct vertices, as in the paper; in general ∑ipi≥1\sum_i p_i \ge 1∑i​pi​≥1. The arithmetic milestones are stated for an arbitrary probability vector on a finite set. Reusable pieces: the probability vector and the cost lemma apply to any randomized kkk-server algorithm on a uniform metric, and a restriction lemma (from nnn vertices to k+1k+1k+1) would serve other paging lower bounds.

Selected references

  • A. Fiat, R. M. Karp, M. Luby, L. A. McGeoch, D. D. Sleator, N. E. Young, Competitive Paging Algorithms, J. Algorithms 12(4):685–699, 1991. https://doi.org/10.1016/0196-6774(91)90041-V ; preprint arXiv:cs/0205038v1 (cited version). https://arxiv.org/abs/cs/0205038
  • D. D. Sleator, R. E. Tarjan, Amortized Efficiency of List Update and Paging Rules, Comm. ACM 28(2):202–208, 1985. https://doi.org/10.1145/2786.2793
  • M. S. Manasse, L. A. McGeoch, D. D. Sleator, Competitive Algorithms for Server Problems, J. Algorithms 11(2):208–230, 1990. https://doi.org/10.1016/0196-6774(90)90003-W
  • L. A. McGeoch, D. D. Sleator, A Strongly Competitive Randomized Paging Algorithm, Algorithmica 6:816–825, 1991.
  • P. Raghavan, Lecture Notes on Randomized Algorithms, IBM Research Report, Yorktown Heights, 1990 (the alternative proof of the lower bound, pp. 118–119).
11 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
ProbabilityTheoretical Computer Science·Captain: mikedeng1

Competitive Paging Algorithms II: Algorithm EATR Is 3/2-Competitive for Two ServersResearch Paper

Motivation

Paging is the problem of managing a two-level memory: a fast cache holding kkk pages and a slow memory holding the rest. When a requested page is not in the cache (a page fault), it must be brought in and, if the cache is full, some page must be evicted. An on-line paging algorithm decides which page to evict without knowing future requests. Sleator and Tarjan (CACM 1985) compared on-line algorithms with the optimal off-line algorithm on every request sequence and showed that the best deterministic algorithms (LRU, FIFO) lose a factor of exactly kkk, and that no deterministic on-line algorithm does better.

Randomization changes this picture. Fiat, Karp, Luby, McGeoch, Sleator and Young (J. Algorithms 1991; arXiv:cs/0205038) showed that the randomized marking algorithm is 2Hk2H_k2Hk​-competitive, where Hk=1+12+⋯+1kH_k=1+\tfrac12+\dots+\tfrac1kHk​=1+21​+⋯+k1​, and that no randomized algorithm is better than HkH_kHk​-competitive. For k<n−1k<n-1k<n−1 the marking algorithm does not reach HkH_kHk​, already for k=2k=2k=2 and n=4n=4n=4. For two servers the same paper gives a different algorithm, EATR ("end after twice requested"), and proves it 3/23/23/2-competitive. Since H2=3/2H_2=3/2H2​=3/2, EATR is strongly competitive for k=2k=2k=2: no randomized algorithm has a smaller competitive factor. This mission formalizes that result.

Timeline:

  • 1985: Sleator and Tarjan, deterministic paging: factor kkk, and kkk is optimal.
  • 1988: Karlin, Manasse, Rudolph and Sleator introduce the term competitive (Algorithmica 3:79–119); Manasse, McGeoch and Sleator formulate the kkk-server problem and extend competitiveness to randomized algorithms (J. Algorithms 1990).
  • 1991: Fiat et al.: the marking algorithm is 2Hk2H_k2Hk​-competitive, the lower bound HkH_kHk​, and EATR is 3/23/23/2-competitive for k=2k=2k=2.
  • 1991: McGeoch and Sleator give an HkH_kHk​-competitive algorithm for every kkk (Algorithmica 6, 1991; reference [12] of the paper).

Setting

The uniform 222-server problem has a finite set MMM of n≥2n\ge 2n≥2 vertices, any two distinct vertices at distance 111, and two servers. A request sequence σ=σ(0),σ(1),…\sigma=\sigma(0),\sigma(1),\dotsσ=σ(0),σ(1),… is a list of vertices; each request must be covered by a server when it is served, and the cost is the number of server moves. This is paging with a cache of two pages: vertices are pages and the covered vertices are the cache.

A deterministic algorithm BBB has a cost CB(σ)C_B(\sigma)CB​(σ); a randomized algorithm AAA has an expected cost CA(σ)C_A(\sigma)CA​(σ), averaged over its random choices. AAA is ccc-competitive if there is a constant aaa such that for every request sequence σ\sigmaσ and every deterministic algorithm BBB (on-line or off-line),

CA(σ)≤c⋅CB(σ)+a.C_A(\sigma)\le c\cdot C_B(\sigma)+a.CA​(σ)≤c⋅CB​(σ)+a.

Algorithm EATR. The servers start on the vertices 111 and 222. The algorithm divides σ\sigmaσ into phases; the first phase starts at the first request to a vertex other than 111 and 222. Let PPP be the set of vertices occupied by the servers at the end of the previous phase ({1,2}\{1,2\}{1,2} before the first phase). During a phase, a vertex is clean if it is not in PPP and has not been requested during this phase; a vertex is stale if it is neither clean nor the most recently requested vertex ℓ\ellℓ. EATR keeps one server on ℓ\ellℓ and the other uniformly at random on the stale set. When a stale vertex rrr is requested, the servers are placed on ℓ\ellℓ and rrr and the phase ends; the next phase starts at the next request to a vertex not covered by a server. Requests between phases, and repeated requests to ℓ\ellℓ, move nothing.

For a phase, lll denotes the number of clean vertices requested in it. For a deterministic algorithm AAA, ddd and d′d'd′ denote the numbers of AAA's servers that do not coincide with any of EATR's servers at the beginning and at the end of the phase. An algorithm is lazy if it moves no server on a request to a covered vertex and exactly one server on a request to an uncovered one.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3

With OPT(σ)\mathrm{OPT}(\sigma)OPT(σ) the optimal off-line cost of serving σ\sigmaσ from the servers' starting position (1,2)(1,2)(1,2), there is a constant ccc such that for all σ\sigmaσ

CEATR(σ)≤32 OPT(σ)+c.C_{\mathrm{EATR}}(\sigma)\le \tfrac32\,\mathrm{OPT}(\sigma)+c.CEATR​(σ)≤23​OPT(σ)+c.

The constant ccc is left free; the factor 3/23/23/2 is the paper's and is optimal.

Milestones, in the order of the proof

  1. Laziness (p. 4): every deterministic algorithm is dominated by a lazy one (a published theorem, reused).
  2. Adversary bound for structured phases (p. 5): in a complete EATR phase with lll clean requests, a lazy AAA pays at least l−d+d′l-d+d'l−d+d′.
  3. Stale set before the terminating request (p. 6): it has l+1l+1l+1 elements, each covered with probability 1/(l+1)1/(l+1)1/(l+1).
  4. Expected cost of a phase to EATR (p. 6): exactly l+ll+1l+\frac{l}{l+1}l+l+1l​.
  5. Per-phase ratio (p. 6): EATR's expected phase cost is at most 32(CA+d−d′)\tfrac32(C_A+d-d')23​(CA​+d−d′), since l+l/(l+1)l=1+1l+1≤32\frac{l+l/(l+1)}{l}=1+\frac{1}{l+1}\le\frac32ll+l/(l+1)​=1+l+11​≤23​.

Significance

The result. Theorem 3 settles the randomized competitive ratio of paging with two cache slots: combined with the paper's lower bound HkH_kHk​ (Corollary 5, the subject of a companion mission), the optimal factor for k=2k=2k=2 is exactly 3/23/23/2, against 222 for every deterministic algorithm. The general case was settled later by McGeoch and Sleator's HkH_kHk​-competitive partitioning algorithm, which is considerably more complicated.

Formalizing it. The result has been proved since 1991; no machine-checked proof of it is on the platform (a search for EATR, randomized paging and two-server results on 2026-09-26 found only deterministic kkk-server theorems). The mission produces a formal model of a randomized on-line algorithm as a probability distribution over states evolving with the request sequence, a formal treatment of the phase decomposition and of the telescoping amortization that relates expected on-line cost to the optimal off-line cost, and a first strongly competitive randomized paging result on the platform, alongside the deterministic kkk-server results already there.

Difficulty

The per-phase computations are short. The main difficulty is the global accounting. The adversary's cost in a phase is bounded only in amortized form, l−d+d′l-d+d'l−d+d′, where ddd and d′d'd′ compare the adversary's servers with EATR's at the phase boundaries; the bound becomes a statement about OPT\mathrm{OPT}OPT only after the ddd and d′d'd′ terms telescope across phases. This needs care with the requests that lie outside every phase (before the first phase, between phases, and in an unfinished last phase), during which the adversary may move. A further difficulty is that the off-line optimum ranges over arbitrary schedules, which may move several servers on one request, while the phase bound is proved for lazy on-line algorithms: the reduction from one to the other must be made explicit. Finally, the uniform law of the stale server is an invariant of a Markov chain on states that must be tracked through the whole phase.

Formalization scope

The vertices are an abstract metric space MMM with an enumeration e:Fin n≃Me:\mathrm{Fin}\,n\simeq Me:Finn≃M, 2≤n2\le n2≤n, and the hypothesis that distinct points are at distance 111; the metric of Fin n\mathrm{Fin}\,nFinn is not used. The starting vertices 1,21,21,2 are e(0),e(1)e(0),e(1)e(0),e(1). OPT\mathrm{OPT}OPT is KServer.offlineCost of the published KServer model: the infimum of total movement over all schedules serving σ\sigmaσ from (e(0),e(1))(e(0),e(1))(e(0),e(1)). Comparing with this infimum covers every deterministic BBB starting from EATR's position; a BBB starting elsewhere differs by at most 222, which the constant absorbs. The constant is quantified before σ\sigmaσ.

EATR is a PMF over states: a deterministic record (the set PPP, whether a phase is in progress, the last requested vertex, the vertices requested in the phase) and the random position of the second server. Its expected cost is the expected number of server moves, summed over the requests. The paper fixes only that the second server is uniform on the stale set; when a clean request enlarges the stale set, the formalization moves one server by a fixed coupling that keeps the law uniform, and this choice is stated in the definition. A formalization that defines EATR's expected cost by the closed formula of the proof, or that restricts σ\sigmaσ to complete phases, would make the goal a different statement; neither is done here. The pre-phase prefix and an unfinished last phase belong to σ\sigmaσ and are covered by the constant.

Needed infrastructure: finite probability distributions (Mathlib's PMF), the published KServer model and its laziness theorem, and bookkeeping lemmas on the deterministic phase record. The phase record and the amortization argument are reusable for the marking algorithm of the companion mission. Proofs of any milestone, and alternative decompositions of the goal, are welcome.

Selected references

  • A. Fiat, R. M. Karp, M. Luby, L. A. McGeoch, D. D. Sleator, N. E. Young, Competitive Paging Algorithms, Journal of Algorithms 12(4):685–699, 1991. https://doi.org/10.1016/0196-6774(91)90041-V ; arXiv:cs/0205038v1, https://arxiv.org/abs/cs/0205038
  • D. D. Sleator, R. E. Tarjan, Amortized Efficiency of List Update and Paging Rules, Communications of the ACM 28(2):202–208, 1985. https://doi.org/10.1145/2786.2793
  • M. S. Manasse, L. A. McGeoch, D. D. Sleator, Competitive Algorithms for Server Problems, Journal of Algorithms 11(2):208–230, 1990. https://doi.org/10.1016/0196-6774(90)90003-W
  • L. A. McGeoch, D. D. Sleator, A Strongly Competitive Randomized Paging Algorithm, Algorithmica 6:816–825, 1991 (reference [12] of the paper).
  • A. R. Karlin, M. S. Manasse, L. Rudolph, D. D. Sleator, Competitive Snoopy Caching, Algorithmica 3(1):79–119, 1988 (reference [9] of the paper).
8 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Information TheoryProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Conditional and Dynamic Convex Risk Measures II: The Conditional Entropic Risk Measure and Conditional Relative EntropyResearch Paper

Motivation

A risk measure assigns to a random financial position XXX a capital requirement ρ(X)\rho(X)ρ(X): the amount of cash that must be added to XXX to make it acceptable. The axiomatic theory of convex risk measures (Föllmer–Schied 2002; Frittelli–Rosazza Gianin 2002) treats this number as computed with no information beyond the model. In practice a regulator or a risk manager revises the requirement as information arrives, so the requirement becomes a random variable measurable with respect to the information available at the time of measurement. Detlefsen and Scandolo (SFB 649 Discussion Paper 2005-006; published in Finance and Stochastics 9(4), 2005, doi:10.1007/s00780-005-0159-6) develop this conditional theory: axioms, a robust representation, and a treatment of dynamic risk measurement.

The entropic risk measure is the standard example of a convex risk measure that is not coherent. It is the capital requirement of an agent with exponential utility uγ(x)=1−e−γxu_\gamma(x)=1-e^{-\gamma x}uγ​(x)=1−e−γx, and its penalty function in the robust representation is the relative entropy 1γH(Q∣P)\frac1\gamma H(Q\mid P)γ1​H(Q∣P) (Föllmer–Schied, Stochastic Finance, Example 4.60, as cited by the paper). Section 5 of the paper carries this example to the conditional setting and shows that its penalty is a conditional relative entropy. The same identity appears in dynamic entropic risk measures, exponential-utility indifference pricing and recursive utility, where one-period conditional entropic measures are composed over time.

Setting

Fix a probability space (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P) and a sub-σ\sigmaσ-algebra G⊆F\mathcal G\subseteq\mathcal FG⊆F, the information available at the time of measurement. L∞L^\inftyL∞ is the space of essentially bounded random variables and LG∞L^\infty_{\mathcal G}LG∞​ its G\mathcal GG-measurable part. All equalities and inequalities between random variables hold PPP-almost surely.

A conditional convex risk measure is a map ρ:L∞→LG∞\rho:L^\infty\to L^\infty_{\mathcal G}ρ:L∞→LG∞​ that is translation invariant (ρ(X+Z)=ρ(X)−Z\rho(X+Z)=\rho(X)-Zρ(X+Z)=ρ(X)−Z for Z∈LG∞Z\in L^\infty_{\mathcal G}Z∈LG∞​), monotone (X≤Y⇒ρ(X)≥ρ(Y)X\le Y\Rightarrow\rho(X)\ge\rho(Y)X≤Y⇒ρ(X)≥ρ(Y)), conditionally convex (ρ(ΛX+(1−Λ)Y)≤Λρ(X)+(1−Λ)ρ(Y)\rho(\Lambda X+(1-\Lambda)Y)\le\Lambda\rho(X)+(1-\Lambda)\rho(Y)ρ(ΛX+(1−Λ)Y)≤Λρ(X)+(1−Λ)ρ(Y) for Λ∈LG∞\Lambda\in L^\infty_{\mathcal G}Λ∈LG∞​, 0≤Λ≤10\le\Lambda\le10≤Λ≤1), and satisfies ρ(0)=0\rho(0)=0ρ(0)=0.

The relevant probability models are

PG={Q probability on (Ω,F):Q≪P, Q(A)=P(A) for all A∈G}.\mathcal P_{\mathcal G}=\{Q \text{ probability on } (\Omega,\mathcal F) : Q\ll P,\ Q(A)=P(A)\ \text{for all } A\in\mathcal G\}.PG​={Q probability on (Ω,F):Q≪P, Q(A)=P(A) for all A∈G}.

The essential supremum of a family X\mathcal XX of [−∞,+∞][-\infty,+\infty][−∞,+∞]-valued random variables is the a.s. smallest random variable that dominates every member a.s.; the essential infimum is defined symmetrically. The minimal penalty of ρ\rhoρ is

α∗(Q)=ess.sup⁡X∈L∞{−EQ(X∣G)−ρ(X)},Q∈PG.\alpha^*(Q)=\operatorname{ess.sup}_{X\in L^\infty}\{-E_Q(X\mid\mathcal G)-\rho(X)\},\qquad Q\in\mathcal P_{\mathcal G}.α∗(Q)=ess.supX∈L∞​{−EQ​(X∣G)−ρ(X)},Q∈PG​.

For a risk aversion γ>0\gamma>0γ>0, the conditional entropic risk measure is

ργ(X)=1γlog⁡EP(e−γX∣G),\rho_\gamma(X)=\frac1\gamma\log E_P\big(e^{-\gamma X}\mid\mathcal G\big),ργ​(X)=γ1​logEP​(e−γX∣G),

the capital requirement for the acceptance set Aγ={X∈L∞:EP(e−γX∣G)≤1}A_\gamma=\{X\in L^\infty : E_P(e^{-\gamma X}\mid\mathcal G)\le1\}Aγ​={X∈L∞:EP​(e−γX∣G)≤1}. For Q∈PGQ\in\mathcal P_{\mathcal G}Q∈PG​ with density φ=dQ/dP\varphi=dQ/dPφ=dQ/dP, the conditional relative entropy is

HG(Q∣P)=EP(φlog⁡φ∣G)∈[0,+∞],0log⁡0=0.H_{\mathcal G}(Q\mid P)=E_P(\varphi\log\varphi\mid\mathcal G)\in[0,+\infty],\qquad 0\log0=0.HG​(Q∣P)=EP​(φlogφ∣G)∈[0,+∞],0log0=0.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 5.4

For every γ>0\gamma>0γ>0:

ργ(X)=ess.sup⁡Q∈PG{−EQ(X∣G)−1γHG(Q∣P)}(X∈L∞),α∗(Q)=1γHG(Q∣P)(Q∈PG).\rho_\gamma(X)=\operatorname{ess.sup}_{Q\in\mathcal P_{\mathcal G}}\Big\{-E_Q(X\mid\mathcal G)-\tfrac1\gamma H_{\mathcal G}(Q\mid P)\Big\}\quad(X\in L^\infty),\qquad \alpha^*(Q)=\tfrac1\gamma H_{\mathcal G}(Q\mid P)\quad(Q\in\mathcal P_{\mathcal G}).ργ​(X)=ess.supQ∈PG​​{−EQ​(X∣G)−γ1​HG​(Q∣P)}(X∈L∞),α∗(Q)=γ1​HG​(Q∣P)(Q∈PG​).

The first identity is representability with the minimal penalty as the penalty; the second identifies that penalty.

Milestones

  1. (Section 5, p. 12) ργ\rho_\gammaργ​ is a conditional convex risk measure.
  2. (Section 5, p. 12) ργ(X)=ess.inf⁡{Y∈LG∞:X+Y∈Aγ}=ess.inf⁡{Y∈LG∞:EP(e−γX∣G)≤eγY}\rho_\gamma(X)=\operatorname{ess.inf}\{Y\in L^\infty_{\mathcal G}: X+Y\in A_\gamma\}=\operatorname{ess.inf}\{Y\in L^\infty_{\mathcal G}: E_P(e^{-\gamma X}\mid\mathcal G)\le e^{\gamma Y}\}ργ​(X)=ess.inf{Y∈LG∞​:X+Y∈Aγ​}=ess.inf{Y∈LG∞​:EP​(e−γX∣G)≤eγY}.
  3. (Proof of Proposition 5.4) ργ\rho_\gammaργ​ is continuous from above: Xn↘XX_n\searrow XXn​↘X implies ργ(Xn)↗ργ(X)\rho_\gamma(X_n)\nearrow\rho_\gamma(X)ργ​(Xn​)↗ργ​(X).
  4. (Section 5, p. 13) For Q∈PGQ\in\mathcal P_{\mathcal G}Q∈PG​: EP(φ∣G)=1E_P(\varphi\mid\mathcal G)=1EP​(φ∣G)=1 and HG(Q∣P)=EQ(log⁡φ∣G)H_{\mathcal G}(Q\mid P)=E_Q(\log\varphi\mid\mathcal G)HG​(Q∣P)=EQ​(logφ∣G).
  5. (Proof of Proposition 5.4) α∗(Q)=1γess.sup⁡Z∈L∞{EQ(Z∣G)−log⁡EP(eZ∣G)}\alpha^*(Q)=\frac1\gamma\operatorname{ess.sup}_{Z\in L^\infty}\{E_Q(Z\mid\mathcal G)-\log E_P(e^Z\mid\mathcal G)\}α∗(Q)=γ1​ess.supZ∈L∞​{EQ​(Z∣G)−logEP​(eZ∣G)}.
  6. (Lemma 5.5) The conditional Donsker–Varadhan formula
ess.sup⁡Z∈L∞{EQ(Z∣G)−log⁡EP(eZ∣G)}=HG(Q∣P),Q∈PG.\operatorname{ess.sup}_{Z\in L^\infty}\{E_Q(Z\mid\mathcal G)-\log E_P(e^Z\mid\mathcal G)\}=H_{\mathcal G}(Q\mid P),\qquad Q\in\mathcal P_{\mathcal G}.ess.supZ∈L∞​{EQ​(Z∣G)−logEP​(eZ∣G)}=HG​(Q∣P),Q∈PG​.

Significance

The result gives the conditional entropic risk measure an explicit dual description: the capital requirement is a worst case over conditional models, each penalized by its conditional relative entropy. This duality is what makes entropic risk measures computable in dynamic settings. Recursive compositions of ργ\rho_\gammaργ​ over a filtration are time consistent, and their penalties add up by the chain rule for conditional relative entropy. Lemma 5.5 is also the conditional form of the Donsker–Varadhan (Gibbs) variational principle, which is used on its own in large deviations and in PAC-Bayesian bounds.

On status: the results are proved in the paper, and the unconditional versions are textbook material. Mathlib has unconditional Kullback–Leibler divergence, tilted measures, conditional Jensen's inequality and a [0,+∞][0,+\infty][0,+∞]-valued conditional expectation. As far as the platform search could establish, neither the conditional relative entropy nor the conditional Donsker–Varadhan formula nor any conditional risk measure has been formalized. This mission produces the first machine-checked conditional version, with HGH_{\mathcal G}HG​ allowed to be infinite.

Difficulty

In the unconditional case both sides of Lemma 5.5 are numbers, and the supremum is a supremum over reals. Conditionally, both sides are random variables. The supremum over the uncountable family indexed by L∞L^\inftyL∞ must be taken in the essential sense, and a pointwise supremum is neither measurable nor meaningful. The conditional relative entropy can be +∞+\infty+∞ on a set of positive probability. The integrand φlog⁡φ\varphi\log\varphiφlogφ need not be integrable, so the usual conditional expectation of L1L^1L1 is not available for it, and the "≥\ge≥" direction must reach an unbounded target through bounded test variables while controlling log⁡EP(eZ∣G)\log E_P(e^{Z}\mid\mathcal G)logEP​(eZ∣G) at the same time. The ess.sup in the goal ranges over measures, not random variables, and each EQ(⋅∣G)E_Q(\cdot\mid\mathcal G)EQ​(⋅∣G) is a conditional expectation under a different measure. These are identified with PPP-a.s. objects through the condition Q=PQ=PQ=P on G\mathcal GG.

Formalization scope

  • (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P) is a probability space (IsProbabilityMeasure P), and G\mathcal GG is m : MeasurableSpace Ω with hm : m ≤ mΩ. Payoffs are real functions with MemLp X ⊤ P. LG∞L^\infty_{\mathcal G}LG∞​ membership is StronglyMeasurable[m] plus MemLp ⊤. Every (in)equality between random variables is PPP-a.e.
  • PG\mathcal P_{\mathcal G}PG​ is the subtype of probability measures Q≪PQ\ll PQ≪P with Q(A)=P(A)Q(A)=P(A)Q(A)=P(A) for all A∈GA\in\mathcal GA∈G. This is equality on G\mathcal GG, not equivalence of measures.
  • EP(⋅∣G)E_P(\cdot\mid\mathcal G)EP​(⋅∣G) and EQ(⋅∣G)E_Q(\cdot\mid\mathcal G)EQ​(⋅∣G) on bounded variables are Mathlib's conditional expectations P[·|m] and Q[·|m]. Bounded variables are integrable under every Q≪PQ\ll PQ≪P, so no junk value arises.
  • ργ\rho_\gammaργ​ is the paper's closed form 1γlog⁡EP(e−γX∣G)\frac1\gamma\log E_P(e^{-\gamma X}\mid\mathcal G)γ1​logEP​(e−γX∣G). The ess.inf descriptions are a milestone, and no positivity hypothesis on XXX is imposed.
  • φ\varphiφ is the real part of the Radon–Nikodym derivative Q.rnDeriv P. HG(Q∣P)H_{\mathcal G}(Q\mid P)HG​(Q∣P) and EQ(log⁡φ∣G)E_Q(\log\varphi\mid\mathcal G)EQ​(logφ∣G) are generalized conditional expectations, E(f+∣G)−E(f−∣G)E(f^+\mid\mathcal G)-E(f^-\mid\mathcal G)E(f+∣G)−E(f−∣G), built from Mathlib's [0,+∞][0,+\infty][0,+∞]-valued condLExp and valued in EReal. The negative parts are integrable, so +∞−(+∞)+\infty-(+\infty)+∞−(+∞) never arises. In EReal, a real number minus +∞+\infty+∞ is −∞-\infty−∞, which is how a model with infinite entropy drops out of the supremum.
  • Essential suprema and infima are predicates (IsEssSup, IsEssInf) on a candidate PPP-a.e. measurable EReal-valued function. The candidate must dominate every member a.s. and lie a.s. below every a.s. upper bound.
  • Continuity from above means: a.s. monotone convergence Xn↘XX_n\searrow XXn​↘X in L∞L^\inftyL∞ implies a.s. monotone convergence ρ(Xn)↗ρ(X)\rho(X_n)\nearrow\rho(X)ρ(Xn​)↗ρ(X).
  • γ\gammaγ is a real constant with γ>0\gamma>0γ>0. The random risk aversion of Remark 5.6 is not formalized.
  • Ruled out: defining HGH_{\mathcal G}HG​ through the Bochner conditional expectation P[φ * log φ | m] (which returns 000 when φlog⁡φ\varphi\log\varphiφlogφ is not integrable) or α∗\alpha^*α∗ through a pointwise supremum would make the goal false or vacuous, and so would stating it for an abstract convex risk measure in place of ργ\rho_\gammaργ​. The formalization uses the extended-valued HGH_{\mathcal G}HG​, the essential supremum, and the explicit ργ\rho_\gammaργ​.
  • The mission is self-contained. It redefines conditional convex risk measures, PG\mathcal P_{\mathcal G}PG​ and the essential supremum in its own namespace CondConvexRisk.Entropic and does not assume the general representation theorem (Theorem 3.2). The generalized conditional expectation and the conditional Donsker–Varadhan formula are reusable beyond risk measures. Contributions are welcome on the ess.sup API (existence, upward-directed families), on conditional monotone convergence for condExp, and on the conditional Jensen step for xlog⁡xx\log xxlogx.

Selected references

  • S. Detlefsen, G. Scandolo, Conditional and Dynamic Convex Risk Measures, SFB 649 Discussion Paper 2005-006, Humboldt-Universität zu Berlin, 2005 (the version formalized; published in Finance and Stochastics 9(4), 2005, https://doi.org/10.1007/s00780-005-0159-6).
  • H. Föllmer, A. Schied, Stochastic Finance: An Introduction in Discrete Time, de Gruyter, Berlin, 2002 (reference [8] of the paper).
  • H. Föllmer, A. Schied, Convex measures of risk and trading constraints, Finance and Stochastics 6:429–447, 2002. https://doi.org/10.1007/s007800200072
  • M. D. Donsker, S. R. S. Varadhan, Asymptotic evaluation of certain Markov process expectations for large time, III, Comm. Pure Appl. Math. 29:389–461, 1976. https://doi.org/10.1002/cpa.3160290405
9 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Optimizing Static Linear Feedback: Gradient Method III: Gradient Descent with the Hessian Step Size Converges Linearly on Strongly Convex FunctionsResearch Paper

Motivation

Gradient descent needs a step size, and the classical choices each ask for something the user may not have. A constant step 1/L1/L1/L needs the Lipschitz constant LLL of the gradient, which is rarely known and often pessimistic. Backtracking needs repeated function evaluations. The exact line search needs a one-dimensional minimization at every iteration. Fatkhullin and Polyak (arXiv:2004.09875v2, SIAM J. Control Optim. 2021, doi:10.1137/20M1329858) proposed a step size for the static linear-quadratic regulator (their rule (4.8), §4.3, p. 11). In §6.1 they point out that the same rule applies to any smooth unconstrained problem min⁡x∈Rnf(x)\min_{x\in\mathbb{R}^n} f(x)minx∈Rn​f(x). The rule divides the squared gradient norm by the Hessian quadratic form along the gradient. It needs one Hessian–vector product per iteration and neither LLL nor the strong convexity constant μ\muμ. In the paper's LQR experiment (§5, Figure 8, p. 13) the algorithm built on this step converges much faster than gradient descent with a constant step tuned at the first iterations.

The paper proves the method converges linearly for strongly convex functions (Theorem 6.1, p. 13). The proof takes one page (Appendix D.4, p. 19). This mission formalizes that theorem. It is the third mission of a series on this paper; the other two concern the LQR gradient method and gradient flow, and this one uses none of their control-theoretic objects.

Setting

Let f:Rn→Rf:\mathbb{R}^n\to\mathbb{R}f:Rn→R be twice differentiable, with gradient ∇f(x)\nabla f(x)∇f(x) and Hessian ∇2f(x)\nabla^2 f(x)∇2f(x). Three constants describe it.

  • fff is μ\muμ-strongly convex, μ>0\mu>0μ>0: f(ax+by)≤af(x)+bf(y)−ab μ2∥x−y∥2f(ax+by)\le af(x)+bf(y)-ab\,\frac{\mu}{2}\|x-y\|^2f(ax+by)≤af(x)+bf(y)−ab2μ​∥x−y∥2 for all x,yx,yx,y and a,b≥0a,b\ge0a,b≥0 with a+b=1a+b=1a+b=1.
  • ∇f\nabla f∇f is Lipschitz with constant LLL: ∥∇f(x)−∇f(y)∥≤L∥x−y∥\|\nabla f(x)-\nabla f(y)\|\le L\|x-y\|∥∇f(x)−∇f(y)∥≤L∥x−y∥.
  • ∇2f\nabla^2 f∇2f is Lipschitz with constant MMM: ∥∇2f(x)−∇2f(y)∥≤M∥x−y∥\|\nabla^2 f(x)-\nabla^2 f(y)\|\le M\|x-y\|∥∇2f(x)−∇2f(y)∥≤M∥x−y∥ in the operator norm.

Let x∗x_*x∗​ be the global minimizer of fff. The Hessian step size at a point xxx is

γ(x)=∥∇f(x)∥2⟨∇2f(x)∇f(x),∇f(x)⟩,\gamma(x)=\frac{\|\nabla f(x)\|^2}{\langle\nabla^2 f(x)\nabla f(x),\nabla f(x)\rangle},γ(x)=⟨∇2f(x)∇f(x),∇f(x)⟩∥∇f(x)∥2​,

the minimizer of the second-order Taylor model of fff along −∇f(x)-\nabla f(x)−∇f(x). The method (6.1) runs

xj+1=xj−γj∇f(xj),γj=γ(xj),x_{j+1}=x_j-\gamma_j\nabla f(x_j),\qquad\gamma_j=\gamma(x_j),xj+1​=xj​−γj​∇f(xj​),γj​=γ(xj​),

from a starting point x0x_0x0​. The damped method with factor σ>0\sigma>0σ>0 runs xj+1=xj−σγj∇f(xj)x_{j+1}=x_j-\sigma\gamma_j\nabla f(x_j)xj+1​=xj​−σγj​∇f(xj​). For a quadratic f(x)=⟨Hx,x⟩f(x)=\langle Hx,x\ranglef(x)=⟨Hx,x⟩ the method (6.1) is steepest descent with exact line search.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6.1 (p. 13), both parts

Under the hypotheses above:

  1. If δ>0\delta>0δ>0 and M2L(f(x0)−f(x∗))≤3μ2(1−δ)M\sqrt{2L(f(x_0)-f(x_*))}\le3\mu^2(1-\delta)M2L(f(x0​)−f(x∗​))​≤3μ2(1−δ) (condition (6.2)), the iterates of (6.1) satisfy
f(xj)−f(x∗)≤(f(x0)−f(x∗))(1−μδL)jfor all j.(6.3)f(x_j)-f(x_*)\le\bigl(f(x_0)-f(x_*)\bigr)\Bigl(1-\frac{\mu\delta}{L}\Bigr)^j\quad\text{for all }j.\tag{6.3}f(xj​)−f(x∗​)≤(f(x0​)−f(x∗​))(1−Lμδ​)jfor all j.(6.3)
  1. If 0<σ≤μ/L0<\sigma\le\mu/L0<σ≤μ/L, the damped iterates from any x0x_0x0​ satisfy
f(xj)−f(x∗)≤(f(x0)−f(x∗))(1−μσL)jfor all j.(6.4)f(x_j)-f(x_*)\le\bigl(f(x_0)-f(x_*)\bigr)\Bigl(1-\frac{\mu\sigma}{L}\Bigr)^j\quad\text{for all }j.\tag{6.4}f(xj​)−f(x∗​)≤(f(x0​)−f(x∗​))(1−Lμσ​)jfor all j.(6.4)

The constants are the paper's, stated exactly.

Milestones (Appendix D.4, p. 19)

  • Cubic Taylor bound (first display): ∣f(x+y)−f(x)−⟨∇f(x),y⟩−12⟨∇2f(x)y,y⟩∣≤M6∥y∥3\bigl|f(x+y)-f(x)-\langle\nabla f(x),y\rangle-\frac12\langle\nabla^2 f(x)y,y\rangle\bigr|\le\frac M6\|y\|^3​f(x+y)−f(x)−⟨∇f(x),y⟩−21​⟨∇2f(x)y,y⟩​≤6M​∥y∥3.
  • One-step inequality (third display): with φj=f(xj)\varphi_j=f(x_j)φj​=f(xj​), φj+1≤φj−12γj∥∇f(xj)∥2(1−Mγj23∥∇f(xj)∥)\varphi_{j+1}\le\varphi_j-\frac12\gamma_j\|\nabla f(x_j)\|^2\bigl(1-\frac{M\gamma_j^2}{3}\|\nabla f(x_j)\|\bigr)φj+1​≤φj​−21​γj​∥∇f(xj​)∥2(1−3Mγj2​​∥∇f(xj​)∥).
  • (D.1): f(y)≤f(x)+⟨∇f(x),y−x⟩+L2μ⟨∇2f(x)(y−x),y−x⟩f(y)\le f(x)+\langle\nabla f(x),y-x\rangle+\frac{L}{2\mu}\langle\nabla^2 f(x)(y-x),y-x\ranglef(y)≤f(x)+⟨∇f(x),y−x⟩+2μL​⟨∇2f(x)(y−x),y−x⟩.
  • (D.2): one damped step gives f(xj+1)≤f(xj)−σγj2∥∇f(xj)∥2f(x_{j+1})\le f(x_j)-\frac{\sigma\gamma_j}{2}\|\nabla f(x_j)\|^2f(xj+1​)≤f(xj​)−2σγj​​∥∇f(xj​)∥2.

Significance

Theorem 6.1 gives a rate for a step size computed from local second-order information alone. Part 1 says that near the minimizer the method converges at least as fast as gradient descent with step δ/L\delta/Lδ/L, with no step-size parameter to tune. Part 2 gives convergence from every starting point, at the price of knowing a lower bound on μ/L\mu/Lμ/L for the damping. The same step appears in the paper's LQR method (rule (4.8)) and in gradient projection methods (p. 13, citing [37]), so the one-step inequalities are reusable beyond this theorem.

The result is proved in the paper. As of this writing none of it has a machine-checked proof. The formal work is the full development: the cubic Taylor bound from a Lipschitz second derivative on Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn, the two one-step inequalities, and the inductions that give the rates.

Difficulty

The obvious argument for gradient descent uses the quadratic upper bound f(y)≤f(x)+⟨∇f(x),y−x⟩+L2∥y−x∥2f(y)\le f(x)+\langle\nabla f(x),y-x\rangle+\frac L2\|y-x\|^2f(y)≤f(x)+⟨∇f(x),y−x⟩+2L​∥y−x∥2 and a step no larger than 2/L2/L2/L. The Hessian step can be as large as 1/μ1/\mu1/μ, far outside that range, so the quadratic bound in the Euclidean norm gives no decrease. Two different replacements are needed. For the undamped method, the cubic Taylor error must be controlled along the whole trajectory, and condition (6.2) is imposed only on x0x_0x0​: the proof must show the gradient stays small enough at every later iterate. For the damped method, the upper bound must be measured in the local Hessian norm (D.1), which trades the step's size for the condition number L/μL/\muL/μ.

On the Lean side, Mathlib has Taylor's theorem in one variable. The cubic bound for a function on Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn with a Lipschitz Fréchet second derivative must be assembled from it or from the integral form along a segment. Mathlib has no ready-made link between strong convexity and a lower bound on the Hessian either.

Formalization scope

The space is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n). The gradient is Mathlib's gradient f. The Hessian quadratic form ⟨∇2f(x)v,v⟩\langle\nabla^2 f(x)v,v\rangle⟨∇2f(x)v,v⟩ is fderiv ℝ (fderiv ℝ f) x v v. Twice differentiability is differentiability of f and of fderiv ℝ f everywhere. The Lipschitz constant of the Hessian is in the operator norm of the bilinear map, not the Frobenius norm. Strong convexity is StrongConvexOn Set.univ μ f with 0 < μ; Mathlib's modulus is μ2∥x−y∥2\frac\mu2\|x-y\|^22μ​∥x−y∥2. LLL and MMM are real constants in the Lipschitz inequalities. The minimizer x∗x_*x∗​ is a hypothesis (f(x∗)≤f(y)f(x_*)\le f(y)f(x∗​)≤f(y) for all yyy), not constructed.

Deviations from the page, all recorded in the items' Formalization Notes:

  • The damping positivity 0<σ0<\sigma0<σ is added. It is implicit on the page.
  • The damped claim is stated under the full hypotheses of Theorem 6.1, including the Lipschitz Hessian, although its proof does not use MMM.
  • The one-step inequality for (6.1) is stated under the strong convexity of Theorem 6.1, which keeps γ≥0\gamma\ge0γ≥0. The gradient's Lipschitz constant is not assumed there.

At a stationary point the step is 0/00/00/0; Lean evaluates it to 000, so the method stays at the minimizer, and both rates remain true.

The iterates are those of the defined recursions (6.1) and its damped version. A statement about an arbitrary sequence satisfying a descent inequality would be a different, weaker theorem and does not discharge the goal. Condition (6.2) is imposed on x0x_0x0​ only; a version assuming it at every iterate is also not the goal.

Contributions welcome: the multivariate cubic Taylor bound (reusable wherever a Lipschitz Hessian appears, e.g. in cubic regularization of Newton's method); the Hessian bounds μI⪯∇2f⪯LI\mu I\preceq\nabla^2 f\preceq LIμI⪯∇2f⪯LI from strong convexity and a Lipschitz gradient; and the inequality 12∥∇f(x)∥2≤L(f(x)−f(x∗))\frac12\|\nabla f(x)\|^2\le L(f(x)-f(x_*))21​∥∇f(x)∥2≤L(f(x)−f(x∗​)).

Selected references

  • I. Fatkhullin, B. Polyak, Optimizing Static Linear Feedback: Gradient Method, arXiv:2004.09875v2, 2020; SIAM J. Control Optim. 59(5), 2021. https://arxiv.org/abs/2004.09875 · https://doi.org/10.1137/20M1329858
  • Yu. Nesterov, B. T. Polyak, Cubic regularization of Newton method and its global performance, Math. Program. 108, 2006 (the cubic Taylor bound for Lipschitz Hessians). https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-006-0706-8
  • B. T. Polyak, Introduction to Optimization, Optimization Software, 1987 (gradient methods, strong convexity).
6 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationNumerical AnalysisOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Projected Gradient Methods for Linearly Constrained Problems I: The Gradient Projection Method Drives the Projected Gradients to ZeroResearch Paper

Motivation

The gradient projection method minimizes a continuously differentiable function over a closed convex set by alternating a gradient step with a projection back onto the set. It was proposed by Goldstein (1964) and by Levitin and Polyak (1966), and it is the basic step of many algorithms for bound constrained and linearly constrained optimization, including large-scale quadratic programming codes.

The classical convergence results either need a Lipschitz constant for the gradient to choose the step (Goldstein; Levitin–Polyak), or assume a bounded sequence of iterates and conclude only that limit points are stationary (Bertsekas, 1976, for the Armijo rule on a box; Dunn, 1981). Calamai and Moré (1987) introduced a general step-size rule that contains the Armijo procedure, and proved a convergence statement that needs no boundedness of the iterates: the projected gradients tend to zero. This statement is what later results on finite identification of the active constraints use as their hypothesis, so it is the natural entry point to the paper.

Setting

Let EEE be a finite-dimensional real inner product space with norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥, let Ω⊆E\Omega \subseteq EΩ⊆E be nonempty, closed and convex, and let f:E→Rf : E \to \mathbb Rf:E→R be continuously differentiable on Ω\OmegaΩ, with gradient ∇f\nabla f∇f taken with respect to the inner product. The problem is

min⁡{f(x):x∈Ω}.(1.1)\min\{f(x) : x \in \Omega\}. \qquad (1.1)min{f(x):x∈Ω}.(1.1)
  • The projection into Ω\OmegaΩ is P(x)=argmin⁡{∥z−x∥:z∈Ω}P(x) = \operatorname{argmin}\{\|z - x\| : z \in \Omega\}P(x)=argmin{∥z−x∥:z∈Ω}, the unique nearest point of Ω\OmegaΩ to xxx (Eq. (1.3)).
  • A point x∗∈Ωx^* \in \Omegax∗∈Ω is stationary if ⟨∇f(x∗),x−x∗⟩≥0\langle \nabla f(x^*), x - x^* \rangle \ge 0⟨∇f(x∗),x−x∗⟩≥0 for all x∈Ωx \in \Omegax∈Ω (Eq. (1.5)).
  • A direction vvv is feasible at x∈Ωx \in \Omegax∈Ω if x+τv∈Ωx + \tau v \in \Omegax+τv∈Ω for all sufficiently small τ>0\tau > 0τ>0; the tangent cone T(x)T(x)T(x) is the closure of the set of feasible directions.
  • The projected gradient is ∇Ωf(x)=argmin⁡{∥v+∇f(x)∥:v∈T(x)}\nabla_\Omega f(x) = \operatorname{argmin}\{\|v + \nabla f(x)\| : v \in T(x)\}∇Ω​f(x)=argmin{∥v+∇f(x)∥:v∈T(x)} (Eq. (3.1)), the nearest point of T(x)T(x)T(x) to −∇f(x)-\nabla f(x)−∇f(x).

A run of the gradient projection method is a pair of sequences (xk)k≥0(x_k)_{k\ge0}(xk​)k≥0​, (αk)k≥0(\alpha_k)_{k \ge 0}(αk​)k≥0​ with x0∈Ωx_0 \in \Omegax0​∈Ω, αk>0\alpha_k > 0αk​>0 and xk+1=xk(αk)x_{k+1} = x_k(\alpha_k)xk+1​=xk​(αk​), where xk(α)=P(xk−α∇f(xk))x_k(\alpha) = P(x_k - \alpha \nabla f(x_k))xk​(α)=P(xk​−α∇f(xk​)). For fixed constants γ1,γ2>0\gamma_1, \gamma_2 > 0γ1​,γ2​>0 and μ1,μ2∈(0,1)\mu_1, \mu_2 \in (0,1)μ1​,μ2​∈(0,1), the steps satisfy the sufficient decrease condition

f(xk+1)≤f(xk)+μ1⟨∇f(xk),xk+1−xk⟩(2.1)f(x_{k+1}) \le f(x_k) + \mu_1 \langle \nabla f(x_k), x_{k+1} - x_k\rangle \qquad (2.1)f(xk+1​)≤f(xk​)+μ1​⟨∇f(xk​),xk+1​−xk​⟩(2.1)

and the condition that the step is not too small: either αk≥γ1\alpha_k \ge \gamma_1αk​≥γ1​, or αk≥γ2αˉk>0\alpha_k \ge \gamma_2 \bar\alpha_k > 0αk​≥γ2​αˉk​>0 for some αˉk\bar\alpha_kαˉk​ at which sufficient decrease fails,

f(xk(αˉk))>f(xk)+μ2⟨∇f(xk),xk(αˉk)−xk⟩.(2.2)–(2.3)f(x_k(\bar\alpha_k)) > f(x_k) + \mu_2 \langle \nabla f(x_k), x_k(\bar\alpha_k) - x_k \rangle. \qquad (2.2)\text{–}(2.3)f(xk​(αˉk​))>f(xk​)+μ2​⟨∇f(xk​),xk​(αˉk​)−xk​⟩.(2.2)–(2.3)

In Lean these objects are proj, projGrad and IsGradientProjectionRun in the namespace CalamaiMore.Convergence, together with the shared definitions tangentCone and IsStationaryPoint in CalamaiMore.Shared.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.2

If, in addition, the steps are bounded, αk≤γ3\alpha_k \le \gamma_3αk​≤γ3​ for some constant γ3\gamma_3γ3​ (3.2), fff is bounded below on Ω\OmegaΩ, and ∇f\nabla f∇f is uniformly continuous on Ω\OmegaΩ, then

lim⁡k→∞∥∇Ωf(xk)∥=0.\lim_{k \to \infty} \|\nabla_\Omega f(x_k)\| = 0.k→∞lim​∥∇Ω​f(xk​)∥=0.

No boundedness of {xk}\{x_k\}{xk​} is assumed, and no specific step rule beyond (2.1)–(2.3).

Milestones

  1. Lemma 2.1: PPP satisfies the variational inequality ⟨P(x)−x,z−P(x)⟩≥0\langle P(x) - x, z - P(x)\rangle \ge 0⟨P(x)−x,z−P(x)⟩≥0 for z∈Ωz \in \Omegaz∈Ω, is monotone (strictly when P(y)≠P(x)P(y) \ne P(x)P(y)=P(x)) and nonexpansive.
  2. Eqs. (2.4)–(2.5): ⟨∇f(xk),xk−xk(α)⟩≥∥xk(α)−xk∥2/α\langle \nabla f(x_k), x_k - x_k(\alpha)\rangle \ge \|x_k(\alpha) - x_k\|^2/\alpha⟨∇f(xk​),xk​−xk​(α)⟩≥∥xk​(α)−xk​∥2/α for α>0\alpha > 0α>0, and its instance at α=αk\alpha = \alpha_kα=αk​.
  3. Lemma 2.2: α↦∥P(x+αd)−x∥/α\alpha \mapsto \|P(x + \alpha d) - x\|/\alphaα↦∥P(x+αd)−x∥/α is nonincreasing on (0,∞)(0, \infty)(0,∞).
  4. Theorem 2.3: under the hypotheses of the goal without (3.2), ∥xk+1−xk∥/αk→0\|x_{k+1} - x_k\|/\alpha_k \to 0∥xk+1​−xk​∥/αk​→0.
  5. Lemma 3.1: −⟨∇f(x),∇Ωf(x)⟩=∥∇Ωf(x)∥2-\langle \nabla f(x), \nabla_\Omega f(x) \rangle = \|\nabla_\Omega f(x)\|^2−⟨∇f(x),∇Ω​f(x)⟩=∥∇Ω​f(x)∥2; min⁡{⟨∇f(x),v⟩:v∈T(x),∥v∥≤1}=−∥∇Ωf(x)∥\min\{\langle \nabla f(x), v\rangle : v \in T(x), \|v\| \le 1\} = -\|\nabla_\Omega f(x)\|min{⟨∇f(x),v⟩:v∈T(x),∥v∥≤1}=−∥∇Ω​f(x)∥; and xxx is stationary if and only if ∇Ωf(x)=0\nabla_\Omega f(x) = 0∇Ω​f(x)=0.
  6. Theorem 2.4: if some subsequence {xk:k∈K}\{x_k : k \in K\}{xk​:k∈K} is bounded, ∥xk+1−xk∥/αk→0\|x_{k+1} - x_k\|/\alpha_k \to 0∥xk+1​−xk​∥/αk​→0 along KKK, and every limit point of {xk}\{x_k\}{xk​} is stationary.
  7. Lemma 3.3: x↦∥∇Ωf(x)∥x \mapsto \|\nabla_\Omega f(x)\|x↦∥∇Ω​f(x)∥ is lower semicontinuous on Ω\OmegaΩ.
  8. Theorem 3.4: with (3.2) and a bounded subsequence {xk:k∈K}\{x_k : k \in K\}{xk​:k∈K}, ∥∇Ωf(xk+1)∥→0\|\nabla_\Omega f(x_{k+1})\| \to 0∥∇Ω​f(xk+1​)∥→0 along KKK.

Significance

By Lemma 3.1, ∥∇Ωf(x)∥\|\nabla_\Omega f(x)\|∥∇Ω​f(x)∥ vanishes exactly at stationary points, so Theorem 3.2 says that the method approaches stationarity in a quantitative sense even when the iterates are unbounded. With Lemma 3.3 it gives that every limit point is stationary. For polyhedral Ω\OmegaΩ it is the hypothesis of the paper's Theorem 4.1: any sequence with ∇Ωf(xk)→0\nabla_\Omega f(x_k) \to 0∇Ω​f(xk​)→0 converging to a nondegenerate point identifies the active constraints in finitely many iterations, which is the basis of active-set methods that switch between gradient projection steps and subspace minimization.

The results are proved in the paper. To our knowledge they have no machine-checked proof. This mission produces a formal account of the gradient projection method with a general step rule, a reusable projected gradient and tangent cone on a general finite-dimensional inner product space, and the standard projection estimates of §2, which are also the starting point of the paper's other two main results.

Difficulty

The obvious argument fails at two places. First, the continuity of ∇Ωf\nabla_\Omega f∇Ω​f cannot be used: the map x↦∇Ωf(x)x \mapsto \nabla_\Omega f(x)x↦∇Ω​f(x) is not continuous, and ∥∇Ωf∥\|\nabla_\Omega f\|∥∇Ω​f∥ can be bounded away from zero in every neighborhood of a stationary point, because the tangent cone changes discontinuously at the boundary of Ω\OmegaΩ. So xk→x∗x_k \to x^*xk​→x∗ with x∗x^*x∗ stationary does not by itself force ∇Ωf(xk)→0\nabla_\Omega f(x_k) \to 0∇Ω​f(xk​)→0, and here the iterates need not converge at all. Second, the steps αk\alpha_kαk​ may tend to zero along a subsequence; the step rule gives information only through a trial step αˉk\bar\alpha_kαˉk​, at a point other than xk+1x_{k+1}xk+1​, and comparing the two projected steps is where the argument must work.

Formalization scope

The space is a type E with [NormedAddCommGroup E] [InnerProductSpace ℝ E] [FiniteDimensional ℝ E]; ∇f\nabla f∇f is Mathlib's gradient f. "Continuously differentiable on Ω\OmegaΩ" is ∀ x ∈ Ω, DifferentiableAt ℝ f x together with ContinuousOn (gradient f) Ω. Bounded below is BddBelow (f '' Ω), uniform continuity is UniformContinuousOn (gradient f) Ω. Sequences are ℕ → E indexed from 000; a subsequence is an infinite K : Set ℕ with limits along atTop ⊓ 𝓟 K; a limit point is a MapClusterPt. The projection and the projected gradient are total functions through a nearest-point map that returns 000 when no nearest point exists; every theorem assumes Ω\OmegaΩ nonempty, closed and convex, and evaluates ∇Ωf\nabla_\Omega f∇Ω​f only at points of Ω\OmegaΩ, where the nearest point exists and is unique. The step rule is a predicate on the pair of sequences, so the theorems cover every rule satisfying (2.1)–(2.3); the auxiliary condition μ1≤μ2\mu_1 \le \mu_2μ1​≤μ2​, which the paper uses only to show that an admissible step exists, is not imposed.

The run predicate is satisfiable: for a constant fff, the constant sequence xk=x0∈Ωx_k = x_0 \in \Omegaxk​=x0​∈Ω with αk=γ1\alpha_k = \gamma_1αk​=γ1​ is a run, so the goal is not vacuous. A formalization that states the goal for an arbitrary map in place of the projection, drops the bound αk≤γ3\alpha_k \le \gamma_3αk​≤γ3​, or replaces ∥∇Ωf(xk)∥\|\nabla_\Omega f(x_k)\|∥∇Ω​f(xk​)∥ by ∥xk+1−xk∥/αk\|x_{k+1} - x_k\|/\alpha_k∥xk+1​−xk​∥/αk​ proves a different theorem and is not accepted.

Contributions welcome: the projection estimates (reusable for any projection-based method), existence and uniqueness of the projected gradient, the characterization of stationarity, and the two limit theorems.

Selected references

  • P. H. Calamai, J. J. Moré, Projected gradient methods for linearly constrained problems, Mathematical Programming 39 (1987) 93–116. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02592073
  • A. A. Goldstein, Convex programming in Hilbert space, Bulletin of the AMS 70 (1964) 709–710. https://doi.org/10.1090/S0002-9904-1964-11178-2
  • E. S. Levitin, B. T. Polyak, Constrained minimization methods, USSR Computational Mathematics and Mathematical Physics 6 (1966) 1–50. https://doi.org/10.1016/0041-5553(66)90114-5
  • D. P. Bertsekas, On the Goldstein–Levitin–Polyak gradient projection method, IEEE Transactions on Automatic Control 21 (1976) 174–184. https://doi.org/10.1109/TAC.1976.1101194
  • J. C. Dunn, Global and asymptotic convergence rate estimates for a class of projected gradient processes, SIAM Journal on Control and Optimization 19 (1981) 368–400. https://doi.org/10.1137/0319022
  • E. M. Gafni, D. P. Bertsekas, Two-metric projection methods for constrained optimization, SIAM Journal on Control and Optimization 22 (1984) 936–964. https://doi.org/10.1137/0322061
15 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
CombinatoricsLinear OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Proximity Results and Faster Algorithms for Integer Programming Using the Steinitz Lemma: ℓ1-Proximity of Integer and LP OptimaResearch Paper

Motivation

Integer programs are routinely solved by first solving their linear programming (LP) relaxation and then searching for an integer optimum near the fractional one. How near an integer optimum must be is the subject of proximity theorems. They bound the search region of branch-and-bound and of dynamic programming, and they turn a fractional optimum into a starting point for exact algorithms.

The classical bound is due to Cook, Gerards, Schrijver and Tardos (Math. Programming 34, 1986): for an integer program in inequality form max⁡{cTx:Ax≤b, x∈Zn}\max\{c^Tx : Ax\le b,\ x\in\mathbb Z^n\}max{cTx:Ax≤b, x∈Zn} that is feasible and bounded, every optimal LP solution x∗x^*x∗ has an optimal integer solution z∗z^*z∗ with ∥x∗−z∗∥∞≤n⋅δ\|x^*-z^*\|_\infty\le n\cdot\delta∥x∗−z∗∥∞​≤n⋅δ, where δ\deltaδ is the largest absolute value of a subdeterminant of AAA. For programs in standard form Ax=bAx=bAx=b with mmm rows this gives, via the Hadamard bound, ∥z∗−x∗∥1≤n2⋅mm/2Δm\|z^*-x^*\|_1\le n^2\cdot m^{m/2}\Delta^m∥z∗−x∗∥1​≤n2⋅mm/2Δm, which grows with the number of variables nnn.

Eisenbrand and Weismantel (ACM Trans. Algorithms 16(1), Article 5, 2019; conference version SODA 2018) removed the dependence on nnn altogether, using the Steinitz lemma on rearranging vectors so that all partial sums stay short. Their bound depends only on mmm and on the largest absolute value Δ\DeltaΔ of an entry of AAA, and it is the basis of their faster algorithms for integer programs with few constraints.

Setting

Fix natural numbers mmm (rows) and nnn (variables). The data are a matrix A∈Zm×nA\in\mathbb Z^{m\times n}A∈Zm×n, a right-hand side b∈Zmb\in\mathbb Z^mb∈Zm, an objective c∈Znc\in\mathbb Z^nc∈Zn and upper bounds u∈Nnu\in\mathbb N^nu∈Nn. A natural number Δ\DeltaΔ bounds the entries: ∣aij∣≤Δ|a_{ij}|\le\Delta∣aij​∣≤Δ for all i,ji,ji,j. The integer program (10) is

max⁡{cTx:Ax=b, 0≤x≤u, x∈Zn},\max\{c^Tx : Ax=b,\ 0\le x\le u,\ x\in\mathbb Z^n\},max{cTx:Ax=b, 0≤x≤u, x∈Zn},

and its LP relaxation is the same problem over x∈Rnx\in\mathbb R^nx∈Rn. Its feasible region P={x∈Rn:Ax=b, 0≤x≤u}P=\{x\in\mathbb R^n: Ax=b,\ 0\le x\le u\}P={x∈Rn:Ax=b, 0≤x≤u} is a polytope, lpPolytope A b u. An optimal vertex solution is an optimal solution of the LP relaxation (IsLPOptimal) that is an extreme point of PPP. An optimal integer solution is IsIPOptimal. Both are maxima.

Distances are measured in the ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​-norm ∥z−x∥1=∑i∣zi−xi∣\|z-x\|_1=\sum_i|z_i-x_i|∥z−x∥1​=∑i​∣zi​−xi​∣.

A vector y∈Zny\in\mathbb Z^ny∈Zn is a cycle of z∗−x∗z^*-x^*z∗−x∗ (Eq. (14)) if Ay=0Ay=0Ay=0 and, for every iii, ∣yi∣≤∣(z∗−x∗)i∣|y_i|\le|(z^*-x^*)_i|∣yi​∣≤∣(z∗−x∗)i​∣ and yi(z∗−x∗)i≥0y_i(z^*-x^*)_i\ge0yi​(z∗−x∗)i​≥0: an integer kernel vector that is sign-compatible with z∗−x∗z^*-x^*z∗−x∗ and dominated by it (IsCycle).

The Steinitz lemma (Theorem 1.1) concerns vectors x1,…,xnx_1,\dots,x_nx1​,…,xn​ in an mmm-dimensional normed space with ∑ixi=0\sum_i x_i=0∑i​xi​=0 and ∥xi∥≤1\|x_i\|\le1∥xi​∥≤1. It asserts a permutation π\piπ with ∥∑j≤kxπ(j)∥≤c(m)\|\sum_{j\le k}x_{\pi(j)}\|\le c(m)∥∑j≤k​xπ(j)​∥≤c(m) for all kkk, and the paper uses Sevast'anov's constant c(m)=mc(m)=mc(m)=m.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.3 (p. 5:8)

If (10) has an integer feasible point and x∗x^*x∗ is an optimal vertex solution of its LP relaxation, then there is an optimal solution z∗z^*z∗ of (10) with

∥z∗−x∗∥1 ≤ m⋅(2mΔ+1)m.\|z^*-x^*\|_1\ \le\ m\cdot(2m\Delta+1)^m .∥z∗−x∗∥1​ ≤ m⋅(2mΔ+1)m.

The constant is the paper's. The goal holds for all mmm, nnn, bbb, ccc and uuu; only mmm and Δ\DeltaΔ enter the bound.

Milestones, in the order the proof uses them

  1. Lemma 3.1 (p. 5:8): for an LP optimum x∗x^*x∗, an integer optimum z∗z^*z∗ and a cycle yyy of z∗−x∗z^*-x^*z∗−x∗, the vector z∗−yz^*-yz∗−y is integer feasible, x∗+yx^*+yx∗+y is LP feasible, and cTy≤0c^Ty\le0cTy≤0.
  2. Lemma 3.2 (p. 5:8): if z∗z^*z∗ minimizes ∥z∗−x∗∥1\|z^*-x^*\|_1∥z∗−x∗∥1​ among the optimal integer solutions, then z∗−x∗z^*-x^*z∗−x∗ has no nonzero cycle.
  3. Theorem 1.1 with c(m)=mc(m)=mc(m)=m (p. 5:4): the Steinitz lemma in any mmm-dimensional real normed space.
  4. Proof of Theorem 3.3 (pp. 5:8–5:9): round a vertex x∗x^*x∗ towards an integer vector and write {x∗}\{x^*\}{x∗} for the remainder. Then ∥−A{x∗}∥∞≤Δm\|-A\{x^*\}\|_\infty\le\Delta m∥−A{x∗}∥∞​≤Δm and −A{x∗}=w1+⋯+wm-A\{x^*\}=w_1+\dots+w_m−A{x∗}=w1​+⋯+wm​ with integer wjw_jwj​, ∥wj∥∞≤Δ\|w_j\|_\infty\le\Delta∥wj​∥∞​≤Δ.
  5. Proof of Theorem 3.3, Eq. (20) (p. 5:9): a sequence of integer vectors of ℓ∞\ell_\inftyℓ∞​-norm at most mΔm\DeltamΔ in which no value repeats m+1m+1m+1 times has length at most m(2mΔ+1)mm(2m\Delta+1)^mm(2mΔ+1)m.
  6. Eq. (21) (p. 5:9), a consequence: cT(x∗−z∗)≤∥c∥∞⋅m(2mΔ+1)mc^T(x^*-z^*)\le\|c\|_\infty\cdot m(2m\Delta+1)^mcT(x∗−z∗)≤∥c∥∞​⋅m(2mΔ+1)m for every optimal integer solution z∗z^*z∗.

Significance

The bound is independent of the number of variables. Combined with the paper's dynamic program, it gives the paper's running-time results for integer programs with upper bounds: an optimal LP vertex is computed, and the integer optimum is searched for within an ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​-ball of radius m(2mΔ+1)mm(2m\Delta+1)^mm(2mΔ+1)m around it. Eq. (21) bounds the absolute integrality gap by the same quantity, scaled by ∥c∥∞\|c\|_\infty∥c∥∞​. The Steinitz lemma with constant mmm is a general tool in discrepancy theory and in scheduling algorithms.

All of these results have published proofs. No machine-checked proof of Theorem 3.3 or of the Steinitz lemma is known to this mission, and Mathlib has no Steinitz lemma. The mission asks for complete Lean proofs of the milestones and of the goal. A proof of the Steinitz lemma with constant mmm for arbitrary norms is reusable well beyond integer programming.

Difficulty

Lemmas 3.1 and 3.2 and the counting step are elementary. The substance lies in two places. The first is the Steinitz lemma with the linear constant mmm for an arbitrary norm: the bound must hold uniformly in the number nnn of vectors, and the constant must be exactly mmm, because the goal's constant (2mΔ+1)m(2m\Delta+1)^m(2mΔ+1)m counts integer points of ℓ∞\ell_\inftyℓ∞​-norm at most mΔm\DeltamΔ. The second is the passage from a vertex to at most mmm fractional coordinates. The paper argues this in one sentence ("x∗x^*x∗ has at most mmm positive entries"), which is not literally true for (10) with upper bounds: coordinates at their upper bound ui>0u_i>0ui​>0 are positive. The correct fact concerns coordinates strictly between 000 and uiu_iui​, and it has to be derived from the extreme-point property of PPP.

Formalization scope

  • All declarations live in the namespace IPProximity.Eisenbrand. The data are integral: A : Matrix (Fin m) (Fin n) ℤ, b : Fin m → ℤ, c : Fin n → ℤ, u : Fin n → ℕ (entries ui=0u_i=0ui​=0 allowed), Δ : ℕ. They are cast to ℝ once, inside the LP definitions. m=0m=0m=0 and n=0n=0n=0 are allowed.
  • "Vertex" is Mathlib's Set.extremePoints ℝ (lpPolytope A b u). It is not defined through bases or by counting fractional coordinates.
  • The ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​-distance is the explicit sum ∑ i, |(z i : ℝ) - x i|. Mathlib's norm on Fin n → ℝ is the sup norm, and it is used only where the paper has ∥⋅∥∞\|\cdot\|_\infty∥⋅∥∞​ (the ∥c∥∞\|c\|_\infty∥c∥∞​ of Eq. (21)).
  • The goal adds one hypothesis the paper leaves implicit: (10) has an integer feasible point. The paper's proof begins with "Let z∗z^*z∗ be an optimal integer solution"; without this hypothesis the conclusion is false.
  • Eq. (14) is formalized literally, so y=0y=0y=0 is a cycle, and Lemma 3.2 is stated for nonzero cycles, which is what its proof establishes. Dropping the vertex hypothesis would make the goal false, so the goal keeps it. The constant is exactly m(2mΔ+1)mm(2m\Delta+1)^mm(2mΔ+1)m, with no hidden existential constant.
  • The Steinitz milestone is stated for any finite-dimensional real normed space of dimension mmm with the explicit constant mmm. The goal needs only the ℓ∞\ell_\inftyℓ∞​ case on Rm\mathbb R^mRm.
  • Out of scope: the dynamic program and the running-time theorems of Sections 2 and 4, and the refinement ∥z∗−x∗∥1≤2Δ\|z^*-x^*\|_1\le2\Delta∥z∗−x∗∥1​≤2Δ for m=1m=1m=1.

Contributions welcome: proofs of any milestone, in particular the Steinitz lemma, and a proof of the goal from the milestones.

Selected references

  • F. Eisenbrand, R. Weismantel, Proximity Results and Faster Algorithms for Integer Programming Using the Steinitz Lemma, ACM Transactions on Algorithms 16(1), Article 5, 2019. https://doi.org/10.1145/3340322
  • W. Cook, A. M. H. Gerards, A. Schrijver, É. Tardos, Sensitivity theorems in integer linear programming, Mathematical Programming 34, 251–264, 1986. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01582230
  • E. Steinitz, Bedingt konvergente Reihen und konvexe Systeme, Journal für die reine und angewandte Mathematik 143, 128–176, 1913. https://doi.org/10.1515/crll.1913.143.128
  • S. Sevast'janov, Approximate solution of some problems of scheduling theory (in Russian), Metody Diskretnogo Analiza 32, 66–75, 1978 (reference [31] of the paper).
  • V. S. Grinberg, S. V. Sevast'yanov, Value of the Steinitz constant, Functional Analysis and Its Applications 14(2), 125–126, 1980 (reference [16] of the paper).
12 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
CombinatoricsGraph TheoryOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Theoretical Improvements in Algorithmic Efficiency for Network Flow Problems 2: The Augmentation Bound for Maximum-Augmentation PathsResearch Paper

Motivation

The maximum flow problem asks how much of a commodity can be sent from a source to a sink through a network whose arcs have capacities. It underlies bipartite matching, transportation, scheduling and many reductions in combinatorial optimization. The classical method for it, the labeling method of Ford and Fulkerson (Flows in Networks, 1962), repeatedly finds an augmenting path and pushes flow along it. With integer capacities it terminates, but the number of augmentations can be as large as the maximum flow value itself, and Edmonds and Karp exhibit a four-node network on which this happens (p. 250). With irrational capacities the method need not terminate at all.

Edmonds and Karp, Theoretical Improvements in Algorithmic Efficiency for Network Flow Problems, J. ACM 19(2):248–264, 1972 (doi:10.1145/321694.321699), showed that two simple rules for choosing the augmenting path repair this. The first, augmenting along a path with fewest arcs, is the subject of mission 1 of this series. This mission covers the second (§1.3): augment along a path that gives the largest possible augmentation. For integer capacities the number of augmentations then grows only logarithmically in the maximum flow value.

Setting

A network NNN has a finite set VVV of nodes, a source sss and a sink t≠st \neq st=s, and a set of arcs, ordered pairs (u,v)(u,v)(u,v) with u≠vu \neq vu=v, at most one from each node to another. One arc is the return arc (t,s)(t,s)(t,s); the other arcs form the set AAA, and each (u,v)∈A(u,v) \in A(u,v)∈A has a capacity c(u,v)>0c(u,v) > 0c(u,v)>0. A flow is a nonnegative function fff on the arcs of NNN with f(u,v)≤c(u,v)f(u,v) \le c(u,v)f(u,v)≤c(u,v) on AAA and flow conservation at every node, sss and ttt included. Its value is f(t,s)f(t,s)f(t,s), the flow returned along the return arc; a maximum flow has the largest value among all flows, and f∗(t,s)f^*(t,s)f∗(t,s) denotes that value.

The residual network NfN^fNf has an arc (u,v)(u,v)(u,v) whenever (u,v)∈A(u,v) \in A(u,v)∈A and c(u,v)−f(u,v)>0c(u,v) - f(u,v) > 0c(u,v)−f(u,v)>0, or (v,u)∈A(v,u) \in A(v,u)∈A and f(v,u)>0f(v,u) > 0f(v,u)>0. An augmenting path is a directed path s=u1,…,up=ts = u_1, \dots, u_p = ts=u1​,…,up​=t of distinct nodes in NfN^fNf. Each of its arcs (u,v)(u,v)(u,v) has a residual amount e(u,v)e(u,v)e(u,v), equal to c(u,v)−f(u,v)c(u,v) - f(u,v)c(u,v)−f(u,v), f(v,u)f(v,u)f(v,u), or c(u,v)−f(u,v)+f(v,u)c(u,v) - f(u,v) + f(v,u)c(u,v)−f(u,v)+f(v,u) according to which of (u,v)(u,v)(u,v), (v,u)(v,u)(v,u) lie in AAA, and the path's augmentation is ε=min⁡e(ui,ui+1)\varepsilon = \min e(u_i, u_{i+1})ε=mine(ui​,ui+1​). Augmenting increases f(t,s)f(t,s)f(t,s) by ε\varepsilonε and changes the flow on the arcs of the path accordingly, with the paper's own rule when both (u,v)(u,v)(u,v) and (v,u)(v,u)(v,u) are arcs. The labeling method produces flows f0,f1,…f^0, f^1, \dotsf0,f1,… by augmenting along a path relative to fkf^kfk as long as one exists.

The rule studied here chooses, at every step, an augmenting path whose ε\varepsilonε is at least that of every other augmenting path relative to the current flow. The bound involves an integer M>1M > 1M>1 such that every partition of the nodes into X∋sX \ni sX∋s and Xˉ∋t\bar X \ni tXˉ∋t has at most MMM arcs of NNN with one end on each side.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2 (p. 253)

For a network with integer capacities, MMM as above, and a run f0,…,fKf^0, \dots, f^Kf0,…,fK of the labeling method with maximum augmentations started from an integer-valued flow,

K  ≤  1+log⁡M/(M−1)f∗(t,s),K \;\le\; 1 + \log_{M/(M-1)} f^*(t,s),K≤1+logM/(M−1)​f∗(t,s),

and if no augmenting path relative to fKf^KfK exists, then fKf^KfK is a maximum flow.

Milestones

The milestone list follows the paper's argument:

  1. augmentation produces a flow of value f(t,s)+εf(t,s) + \varepsilonf(t,s)+ε (§1.1, p. 249);
  2. a flow is maximum if and only if it has no augmenting path (§1.1, pp. 249–250);
  3. with integer capacities, ε\varepsilonε is a positive integer and the flows of the method stay integer-valued (§1.1, p. 250);
  4. the cut inequality c(X,Xˉ)≥f(X,Xˉ)−f(Xˉ,X)=f(t,s)c(X,\bar X) \ge f(X,\bar X) - f(\bar X,X) = f(t,s)c(X,Xˉ)≥f(X,Xˉ)−f(Xˉ,X)=f(t,s) (p. 254);
  5. f∗(t,s)−fk(t,s)≤εkMf^*(t,s) - f^k(t,s) \le \varepsilon^k Mf∗(t,s)−fk(t,s)≤εkM, where εk=fk+1(t,s)−fk(t,s)\varepsilon^k = f^{k+1}(t,s) - f^k(t,s)εk=fk+1(t,s)−fk(t,s) (p. 254);
  6. f∗(t,s)−fk+1(t,s)≤[f∗(t,s)−fk(t,s)](1−M−1)f^*(t,s) - f^{k+1}(t,s) \le [f^*(t,s) - f^k(t,s)](1 - M^{-1})f∗(t,s)−fk+1(t,s)≤[f∗(t,s)−fk(t,s)](1−M−1) (p. 254);
  7. f∗(t,s)−fk(t,s)≤f∗(t,s)(1−M−1)kf^*(t,s) - f^k(t,s) \le f^*(t,s)(1 - M^{-1})^kf∗(t,s)−fk(t,s)≤f∗(t,s)(1−M−1)k (p. 254).

Significance

Theorem 2 was among the first bounds showing that a maximum flow algorithm can be made polynomial in the size of the numbers rather than in their values: since M≤n2/2M \le n^2/2M≤n2/2 and f∗(t,s)f^*(t,s)f∗(t,s) is at most n2n^2n2 times the average capacity, the bound is O(n2log⁡(n2cˉ))O(n^2 \log(n^2 \bar c))O(n2log(n2cˉ)) in terms of the number of nodes nnn and the average capacity cˉ\bar ccˉ (p. 254). The largest-augmentation rule, often called the fattest-path or maximum-capacity augmenting path rule, is a standard textbook variant, and its geometric-decrease argument is the model for later capacity-scaling methods, including the scaling algorithm for the Hitchcock problem in §2 of the same paper (mission 3 of this series).

The theorem has been proved since 1972 and appears in standard texts. As far as a platform search shows (2026-09-26), no machine-checked proof of it exists on Prove2Me. The platform does contain LinearOptimization.max_flow_min_cut and LinearOptimization.max_flow_ford_fulkerson_integer_termination, which state max-flow min-cut and termination of the generic method in a different network model (parallel arcs, extended nonnegative capacities, no return arc); they give no count of augmentations and are related work only. This mission would contribute a formal proof of the counting bound together with the general labeling-method facts (milestones 1–3), which mission 1 needs as well.

Difficulty

The obvious argument, that each augmentation raises the value by at least 1, gives only the bound f∗(t,s)f^*(t,s)f∗(t,s), and on the four-node example of p. 250 that bound is attained by an arbitrary choice of paths. The logarithmic bound needs a lower bound on the size of the largest augmentation in terms of the remaining gap f∗(t,s)−fk(t,s)f^*(t,s) - f^k(t,s)f∗(t,s)−fk(t,s). The largest augmentation is defined by comparison with all augmenting paths relative to the current flow, while the gap is a global quantity of the network, and neither integrality nor the maximum-augmentation rule alone controls it. Milestone 2's converse, that a non-maximum flow always admits an augmenting path, is itself the max-flow min-cut theorem in this model, and the formal proof has to establish it for the paper's return-arc model rather than import it from a different one.

Formalization scope

  • Nodes form a finite type V with decidable equality. A : Finset (V × V) contains no loops and not (t,s)(t,s)(t,s). Capacities are real, c : V → V → ℝ, positive on A. Integrality is the hypothesis IntegralCaps N, and for the initial flow IsIntegralOn N (f 0) (integer values on the arcs of NNN, the return arc included).
  • Flows are functions V → V → ℝ constrained only on the arcs of NNN. A maximum flow is the predicate IsMaxFlow, comparing f(t,s)f(t,s)f(t,s) with every flow, not a supremum. The goal takes a maximum flow g as a hypothesis and sets f∗(t,s)=g(t,s)f^*(t,s) = g(t,s)f∗(t,s)=g(t,s); every network has one.
  • Augmenting paths are duplicate-free node lists whose consecutive pairs are arcs of NfN^fNf. The page prints Case (b) of the definition of εi\varepsilon_iεi​ with the same hypothesis as Case (c); the corrected Case (b), (u,v)∉A(u,v) \notin A(u,v)∈/A and (v,u)∈A(v,u) \in A(v,u)∈A, is used, as the definition of NfN^fNf (p. 251) and the list for e(u,v)e(u,v)e(u,v) (p. 253) confirm.
  • A run is IsMaxAugRun N K f P. Its initial flow is arbitrary except for integrality, and each later flow is the augmentation of the previous one along a path of maximum ε\varepsilonε among all augmenting paths.
  • The crossing bound CrossArcsBounded N M counts the arcs of NNN, return arc included, with one end on each side of every sss–ttt partition. This is the literal reading of p. 253.
  • Explicit constants. The bound is exactly 1+log⁡M/(M−1)f∗(t,s)1 + \log_{M/(M-1)} f^*(t,s)1+logM/(M−1)​f∗(t,s), written (K : ℝ) ≤ 1 + Real.logb ((M : ℝ) / ((M : ℝ) - 1)) (g N.t N.s) with M>1M > 1M>1 a natural number. When f∗(t,s)=0f^*(t,s) = 0f∗(t,s)=0, Real.logb gives 000 and the bound reads K≤1K \le 1K≤1. The contraction factor is 1 - (M : ℝ)⁻¹.
  • A statement that bounds only runs of an unsatisfiable step predicate, drops the integrality of f0f^0f0 or of the capacities (the bound is false without them), or compares ε\varepsilonε only among paths of some restricted class does not formalize Theorem 2. A sorry-free check exhibits a four-node network with integer capacities and a valid maximum-augmentation step.
  • Reusable beyond this mission: the return-arc network model, the augmentation step with the paper's opposite-arc rule, the integrality lemma, and the cut inequality. Proofs of any milestone are welcome, as are proofs of the converse in milestone 2 that could later be shared with mission 1.

Selected references

  • J. Edmonds, R. M. Karp, Theoretical Improvements in Algorithmic Efficiency for Network Flow Problems, Journal of the ACM 19(2):248–264, 1972. https://doi.org/10.1145/321694.321699
  • L. R. Ford, D. R. Fulkerson, Flows in Networks, RAND report R-375-PR, 1962; Princeton University Press, 1962. https://www.rand.org/pubs/reports/R375.html
11 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Algorithmic Game TheoryProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

An Analog of the Minimax Theorem for Vector Payoffs: A Closed Convex Set Is Approachable If and Only If It Meets Every T(q), and Is Otherwise ExcludableResearch Paper

Motivation

Von Neumann's minimax theorem says that in a zero-sum game with real payoffs, Player I can guarantee an expected gain of at least the value vvv and Player II can hold it to at most vvv. In a long series of plays, the law of large numbers turns this into a statement about the average payoff: I can make it exceed v−εv-\varepsilonv−ε, II can keep it below v+εv+\varepsilonv+ε, with probability approaching one.

Blackwell's 1956 paper asks the same question when the payoff of each play is a vector in RN\mathbb R^NRN rather than a number. A single player then cannot optimize "the" payoff, and the natural question becomes geometric: can a player force the running average of the payoff vectors to converge to a prescribed set SSS, whatever the opponent does? The resulting notion, approachability, became a basic tool in repeated games with incomplete information (Aumann–Maschler), in the theory of calibration and regret minimization (Foster–Vohra; Hart–Mas-Colell), and in online learning, where no-regret algorithms and Blackwell approachability are known to be equivalent (Abernethy–Bartlett–Hazan 2011).

Timeline.

  • 1928: von Neumann's minimax theorem for matrix games.
  • 1954: Blackwell's maximal inequality for sums with negative conditional drift (On optimal systems, Ann. Math. Statist.), quoted in this paper as THEOREM 2.
  • 1956: this paper. A sufficient condition for approachability (THEOREM 1), a complete characterization for closed convex sets (THEOREM 3) and for N=1N=1N=1, an example of a set that is neither approachable nor excludable, and a conjecture on weak approachability.
  • 1992: Vieille proved Blackwell's conjecture that every set is weakly approachable or weakly excludable.

Setting

Fix integers N≥0N\ge0N≥0 and r,s≥1r,s\ge1r,s≥1, and a closed, bounded, convex set X⊆RNX\subseteq\mathbb R^NX⊆RN. The game is an r×sr\times sr×s matrix M=∥m(i,j)∥M=\|m(i,j)\|M=∥m(i,j)∥ whose entries are probability distributions concentrated on XXX. Write mˉ(i,j)\bar m(i,j)mˉ(i,j) for the mean of m(i,j)m(i,j)m(i,j), PPP for the simplex of mixed actions p=(p1,…,pr)p=(p_1,\dots,p_r)p=(p1​,…,pr​) of Player I, and QQQ for that of Player II.

A strategy f={fn}n≥0f=\{f_n\}_{n\ge0}f={fn​}n≥0​ of I is a sequence of measurable maps from the nnn-tuples (x1,…,xn)(x_1,\dots,x_n)(x1​,…,xn​) of past outcomes to PPP; f0f_0f0​ is a point of PPP. Strategies g={gn}g=\{g_n\}g={gn​} of II take values in QQQ. A play of (f,g)(f,g)(f,g) is a sequence of random vectors x1,x2,…x_1,x_2,\dotsx1​,x2​,… such that, given x1,…,xnx_1,\dots,x_nx1​,…,xn​, the players draw iii and jjj independently from fn(x1,…,xn)f_n(x_1,\dots,x_n)fn​(x1​,…,xn​) and gn(x1,…,xn)g_n(x_1,\dots,x_n)gn​(x1​,…,xn​), and xn+1x_{n+1}xn+1​ is drawn from m(i,j)m(i,j)m(i,j). The average payoff is xˉn=1n∑i=1nxi\bar x_n=\frac1n\sum_{i=1}^n x_ixˉn​=n1​∑i=1n​xi​, and δn\delta_nδn​ is its distance from SSS.

A set S⊆RNS\subseteq\mathbb R^NS⊆RN is approachable with f∗f^*f∗ if for every ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 there is N0N_0N0​ such that for every strategy ggg of II,

Prob{δn≥ε for some n≥N0}<ε.\mathrm{Prob}\{\delta_n\ge\varepsilon\text{ for some }n\ge N_0\}<\varepsilon .Prob{δn​≥ε for some n≥N0​}<ε.

It is excludable with g∗g^*g∗ if there is d>0d>0d>0 such that for every ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 there is N0N_0N0​ such that for every strategy fff of I,

Prob{δn≥d for all n≥N0}>1−ε.\mathrm{Prob}\{\delta_n\ge d\text{ for all }n\ge N_0\}>1-\varepsilon .Prob{δn​≥d for all n≥N0​}>1−ε.

SSS is approachable (excludable) if some strategy approaches (excludes) it. Finally, for p∈Pp\in Pp∈P and q∈Qq\in Qq∈Q,

R(p)=conv⁡{∑ipimˉ(i,j)}j=1s,T(q)=conv⁡{∑jqjmˉ(i,j)}i=1r:R(p)=\operatorname{conv}\Big\{\textstyle\sum_i p_i\bar m(i,j)\Big\}_{j=1}^{s},\qquad T(q)=\operatorname{conv}\Big\{\textstyle\sum_j q_j\bar m(i,j)\Big\}_{i=1}^{r}:R(p)=conv{∑i​pi​mˉ(i,j)}j=1s​,T(q)=conv{∑j​qj​mˉ(i,j)}i=1r​:

R(p)R(p)R(p) is the set of expected payoffs I can guarantee to stay in by playing ppp, and T(q)T(q)T(q) the set II can confine them to by playing qqq.

Formalization targets

Goal: THEOREM 3

For a closed convex set S⊆RNS\subseteq\mathbb R^NS⊆RN,

S is approachable  ⟺  S∩T(q)≠∅  for every q∈Q,S\text{ is approachable}\iff S\cap T(q)\neq\emptyset\ \text{ for every }q\in Q,S is approachable⟺S∩T(q)=∅  for every q∈Q,

and if S∩T(q0)=∅S\cap T(q_0)=\emptysetS∩T(q0​)=∅ then SSS is excludable with the stationary strategy gn≡q0g_n\equiv q_0gn​≡q0​. In particular every closed convex set is either approachable or excludable. Both sentences are part of the goal.

Milestones, in the paper's order

  1. THEOREM 2: for ∣zk∣≤1|z_k|\le1∣zk​∣≤1 with E(zk∣z1,…,zk−1)≤−u E(∣zk∣∣z1,…,zk−1)E(z_k\mid z_1,\dots,z_{k-1})\le-u\,E(|z_k|\mid z_1,\dots,z_{k-1})E(zk​∣z1​,…,zk−1​)≤−uE(∣zk​∣∣z1​,…,zk−1​) and 0<u<10<u<10<u<1,
Prob{z1+⋯+zk≥t for some k}≤(1−u1+u)t.\mathrm{Prob}\{z_1+\dots+z_k\ge t\text{ for some }k\}\le\Big(\tfrac{1-u}{1+u}\Big)^t .Prob{z1​+⋯+zk​≥t for some k}≤(1+u1−u​)t.
  1. The LEMMA: a sequence satisfying the almost-supermartingale conditions (5), (6), (7) converges to 000 at a rate depending only on the constants a,b,ca,b,ca,b,c.
  2. In the proof of THEOREM 1, the squared distances δn2\delta_n^2δn2​ satisfy (5)–(7) uniformly in II's strategy.
  3. THEOREM 1: if every x∉Sx\notin Sx∈/S admits p(x)∈Pp(x)\in Pp(x)∈P such that the hyperplane through a closest point y∈Sy\in Sy∈S, perpendicular to xyxyxy, separates xxx from R(p(x))R(p(x))R(p(x)), then SSS is approachable with any strategy playing p(xˉn)p(\bar x_n)p(xˉn​) when xˉn∉S\bar x_n\notin Sxˉn​∈/S.
  4. No set is both approachable and excludable.
  5. If a closed SSS is approachable in the transpose M′M'M′ with fff, then every closed TTT disjoint from SSS is excludable in MMM with fff.
  6. A closed convex SSS meeting every T(q)T(q)T(q) satisfies THEOREM 1's hypothesis.
  7. Every T(q0)T(q_0)T(q0​) is approachable in M′M'M′ with fn≡q0f_n\equiv q_0fn​≡q0​.

Significance

The result. THEOREM 3 is the vector analogue of the minimax theorem. For a closed convex target it reduces an infinite-horizon stochastic question, about every strategy of the opponent over all histories, to a finite family of one-shot conditions on the mean matrix Mˉ\bar MMˉ, and it shows that the game is determined for convex targets: one of the two players always wins. Its sufficient condition, THEOREM 1, is the origin of the "Blackwell strategy", which steers the average toward the target by playing, at each step, a mixed action that pushes the expected next payoff across the supporting hyperplane. Regret-matching, calibration algorithms and the reductions between online linear optimization and approachability are instances of this construction.

Formalizing it. The result is proved in the paper; to the best of available knowledge no machine-checked proof of it exists. This mission produces one: the stochastic model of a repeated game with vector payoffs, the probabilistic estimates (THEOREM 2 and the LEMMA) with the uniform rate the paper claims, and the minimax reduction for convex sets. A related platform mission, Introduction to Online Convex Optimization XIII, states a deterministic, sufficiency-only textbook variant for bounded sets; the present mission covers the stochastic model, unbounded convex targets, and the excludability half.

Difficulty

The obvious argument shows that the expected squared distance Eδn2E\delta_n^2Eδn2​ decreases like 1/n1/n1/n. That is not approachability: the definition asks for the probability that the average is ever again ε\varepsilonε-far after time N0N_0N0​, uniformly over the opponent's strategies. Controlling the whole tail of the path, with a threshold N0N_0N0​ that does not depend on the opponent, is the step that fails for a naive expectation bound and is why the paper needs a maximal inequality for sums with negative conditional drift. On the geometric side, the "only if" direction is not automatic: it requires that approachability and excludability be incompatible, which in turn requires that a play of every pair of strategies exists.

Formalization scope

Points live in EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin N); pure actions are Fin r and Fin s; mixed actions are elements of stdSimplex. The game is a structure carrying XXX (closed, bounded, convex) and the distributions m(i,j)m(i,j)m(i,j) (probability measures with m(i,j)(Xc)=0m(i,j)(X^{c})=0m(i,j)(Xc)=0). A play is described by the conditional law of the next outcome given the past, and approachability and excludability quantify over every probability space in Type carrying such a play. Distances are extended (Metric.infEDist), equal to +∞+\infty+∞ to the empty set.

Conventions and disclosed additions:

  • r,s≥1r,s\ge1r,s≥1 where a statement needs both players to have strategies;
  • strategies are measurable in the history;
  • outcomes are indexed from 111; (5) and (7) start at n=2n=2n=2, (6) at n=1n=1n=1;
  • "the closest point" in THEOREM 1 is some closest point, and "separates" is weak separation;
  • THEOREM 2 is stated with E(∣zk∣∣⋅)E(|z_k|\mid\cdot)E(∣zk​∣∣⋅) in place of the printed "max" (the weaker hypothesis, as in the cited source), and with u<1u<1u<1 so that ((1−u)/(1+u))t((1-u)/(1+u))^t((1−u)/(1+u))t is a real power.

SSS is not assumed bounded or nonempty. With the real-valued distance, the empty set would be approachable with every strategy and THEOREM 3 would be false; the extended distance rules this out. Stating only the sufficiency direction, fixing the approaching strategy in the hypotheses, or assuming a play exists would each trivialize the goal, and none is done.

A complete development needs: conditional laws of the next outcome from a strategy pair (Ionescu–Tulcea, Kernel.traj in Mathlib), a nonnegative-supermartingale maximal inequality, the metric projection onto closed convex sets, and the minimax theorem (Mathlib's Sion theorem). The maximal inequality of THEOREM 2 and the LEMMA are reusable beyond this mission. Contributions to any milestone, and to a construction of plays, are welcome.

Selected references

  • D. Blackwell, An analog of the minimax theorem for vector payoffs, Pacific J. Math. 6(1):1–8, 1956. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1956.6.1
  • D. Blackwell, On optimal systems, Ann. Math. Statist. 25(2):394–397, 1954. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177728796
  • N. Vieille, Weak approachability, Math. Oper. Res. 17(4):781–791, 1992. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.17.4.781
  • J. Abernethy, P. Bartlett, E. Hazan, Blackwell approachability and no-regret learning are equivalent, COLT 2011. https://arxiv.org/abs/1011.1936
  • S. Hart, A. Mas-Colell, A simple adaptive procedure leading to correlated equilibrium, Econometrica 68(5):1127–1150, 2000. https://doi.org/10.1111/1468-0262.00153
12 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
CombinatoricsDynamic ProgrammingGraph Theory·Captain: mikedeng1

The Steiner Problem in Graphs: Algorithm A Computes the Length of the Steiner TreeResearch Paper

Motivation

The Steiner problem in graphs asks for the cheapest way to connect a prescribed set of nodes of a network, where intermediate nodes may be used freely. It is the network version of the classical Euclidean Steiner tree problem surveyed by Gilbert and Pollak (SIAM J. Appl. Math. 16, 1968), and it arises wherever a few sites must be joined through an existing network at minimum total cost: communication and pipeline layout, VLSI routing, and phylogenetics. With two terminals it is the shortest-path problem; with all nodes as terminals it is the minimum spanning tree problem; in between it is NP-hard.

Dreyfus and Wagner (Networks 1(3):195–207, 1971) gave the first exact algorithm whose running time is exponential only in the number kkk of terminals and polynomial in the number nnn of nodes. The paper states it, as Algorithm A, together with its proof of correctness and an exact count of its elementary operations.

Timeline. 1968: Gilbert and Pollak survey Steiner minimal trees. 1971: Dreyfus and Wagner, a dynamic program over subsets of terminals running in time proportional to n3/2+n2(2k−1−k−1)+n(3k−1−2k+3)/2n^3/2 + n^2(2^{k-1}-k-1) + n(3^{k-1}-2^k+3)/2n3/2+n2(2k−1−k−1)+n(3k−1−2k+3)/2. 1987: Erickson, Monma and Veinott give the same subset recursion for general network flow problems. 2007: Björklund, Husfeldt, Kaski and Koivisto (STOC 2007) improve the exponential dependence on kkk for small integer weights. The Dreyfus–Wagner recursion remains the standard exact method and the basis of the fixed-parameter tractability of the problem in kkk.

Setting

A graph G=(N,A)G = (N, A)G=(N,A) has a finite set NNN of nodes and a set AAA of undirected arcs, each arc aaa having a positive length ∣a∣|a|∣a∣; GGG is connected. For a set S⊆AS \subseteq AS⊆A of arcs, ∣S∣=∑s∈S∣s∣|S| = \sum_{s \in S} |s|∣S∣=∑s∈S​∣s∣. A set SSS connects a node set XXX if all members of XXX are joined by paths composed only of arcs in SSS.

Given Y⊆NY \subseteq NY⊆N, a Steiner path (or Steiner tree) connecting YYY is a set S⊆AS \subseteq AS⊆A that connects YYY with ∣S∣|S|∣S∣ minimum. Its length is the Steiner length St⁡(Y)\operatorname{St}(Y)St(Y). For nodes i,ji, ji,j, D(i,j)D(i,j)D(i,j) is the length of a shortest path from iii to jjj; D(i,j)=St⁡({i,j})D(i,j) = \operatorname{St}(\{i,j\})D(i,j)=St({i,j}).

Algorithm A fixes a linear order of NNN (so that each nonempty set DDD has a first element D[1]D[1]D[1]), picks q∈Yq \in Yq∈Y, sets C=Y−{q}C = Y - \{q\}C=Y−{q}, and fills a table S[D,I]S[D, I]S[D,I] for nonempty D⊊CD \subsetneq CD⊊C and I∈NI \in NI∈N:

S[{t},I]=D(t,I),S[D,I]=min⁡J∈N(D(I,J)+min⁡D[1]∈E⊊D(S[E,J]+S[D−E,J])),S[\{t\}, I] = D(t, I), \qquad S[D, I] = \min_{J \in N}\Big(D(I,J) + \min_{D[1] \in E \subsetneq D}\big(S[E,J] + S[D-E,J]\big)\Big),S[{t},I]=D(t,I),S[D,I]=J∈Nmin​(D(I,J)+D[1]∈E⊊Dmin​(S[E,J]+S[D−E,J])),

and returns

v=min⁡J∈N(D(q,J)+min⁡C[1]∈E⊊C(S[E,J]+S[C−E,J])).v = \min_{J \in N}\Big(D(q,J) + \min_{C[1] \in E \subsetneq C}\big(S[E,J] + S[C-E,J]\big)\Big).v=J∈Nmin​(D(q,J)+C[1]∈E⊊Cmin​(S[E,J]+S[C−E,J])).

A minimum over an empty set is +∞+\infty+∞. In the Lean development these objects are steinerLength, pathDist, tableA and algorithmA in the namespace DreyfusWagner.Steiner.

Formalization targets

Goal: Algorithm A is exact

For every finite connected graph with positive arc lengths, every linear order on its nodes, every YYY with ∥Y∥≥3\|Y\| \ge 3∥Y∥≥3 and every q∈Yq \in Yq∈Y,

v=St⁡(Y).v = \operatorname{St}(Y).v=St(Y).

This is the caption of Algorithm A ("Computes the length of the Steiner tree connecting YYY", p. 203). The statement is an equality, not a bound.

Milestones

In the order the proof uses them:

  1. A Steiner path is a tree (§1, p. 197): a minimum connecting arc set contains no cycle.
  2. The two-node case (Appendix A, p. 205): St⁡({i,j})=D(i,j)\operatorname{St}(\{i,j\}) = D(i,j)St({i,j})=D(i,j).
  3. Theorem 1 (Appendix A, p. 206): for a Steiner tree SSS, a node xxx on it, and a set CCC of arcs of SSS at xxx, the arcs of SSS connecting xxx to the terminals reached through CCC form a Steiner tree for those terminals together with xxx.
  4. Optimal Decomposition Theorem (Appendix A, p. 206): if ∥Y∥≥3\|Y\| \ge 3∥Y∥≥3 and q∈Yq \in Yq∈Y, a Steiner tree for YYY splits into three disjoint Steiner paths, for {p,q}\{p,q\}{p,q}, {p}∪D\{p\} \cup D{p}∪D and {p}∪(Y−D−{q})\{p\} \cup (Y - D - \{q\}){p}∪(Y−D−{q}), where p∈Np \in Np∈N and ∅≠D⊊Y−{q}\emptyset \ne D \subsetneq Y - \{q\}∅=D⊊Y−{q}.
  5. The recurrence (§2, pp. 199–200): for ∥D∥≥2\|D\| \ge 2∥D∥≥2 and any node mmm,
St⁡({m}∪D)=min⁡k∈N(D(m,k)+min⁡∅≠E⊊D(St⁡({k}∪E)+St⁡({k}∪(D−E)))).\operatorname{St}(\{m\} \cup D) = \min_{k \in N}\Big(D(m,k) + \min_{\emptyset \ne E \subsetneq D}\big(\operatorname{St}(\{k\} \cup E) + \operatorname{St}(\{k\} \cup (D - E))\big)\Big).St({m}∪D)=k∈Nmin​(D(m,k)+∅=E⊊Dmin​(St({k}∪E)+St({k}∪(D−E)))).
  1. The table invariant (§2, p. 200): S[D,I]=St⁡({I}∪D)S[D, I] = \operatorname{St}(\{I\} \cup D)S[D,I]=St({I}∪D) for every nonempty DDD and every III.

Two companion items accompany the goal: the numerical illustration of §3 (seven nodes, St⁡(Y)=5\operatorname{St}(Y) = 5St(Y)=5, Algorithm A returns 555), and the exact count of elementary statements of §5, n2(2k−1−k−1)+n(3k−1−2k+3)/2n^2(2^{k-1}-k-1) + n(3^{k-1}-2^k+3)/2n2(2k−1−k−1)+n(3k−1−2k+3)/2.

Significance

The result turns the Steiner problem with few terminals into a polynomial computation in the size of the network: for fixed kkk the running time is O(n3)O(n^3)O(n3) including all-pairs shortest paths. It is the reference exact algorithm against which heuristics and approximation algorithms for Steiner trees are evaluated, a standard example of dynamic programming over subsets, and the origin of the fixed-parameter tractability of the Steiner tree problem parameterized by the number of terminals. The subset recurrence reappears in group Steiner, prize-collecting and directed Steiner variants.

The paper's proof is complete and the result is classical; it has not, to our knowledge, been machine-checked. This mission produces a checked account of the exactness of the recursion: the structural facts about minimum connecting arc sets (acyclicity, optimality of branches, the three-way decomposition) and the passage from these to the algorithm's table. These facts about weighted graphs, minimum connecting arc sets and shortest paths are reusable well beyond this paper.

Difficulty

The upper bound v≥St⁡(Y)v \ge \operatorname{St}(Y)v≥St(Y) is routine: each term of each minimum is the length of some connecting arc set, so no term can beat the optimum. The content is the reverse inequality, which needs the Optimal Decomposition Theorem: one must show that some optimal tree actually splits at a single node ppp into a shortest path to qqq and two optimal subtrees whose terminal sets partition Y−{q}Y - \{q\}Y−{q} into two nonempty parts. The naive choice p=qp = qp=q fails when qqq is a leaf, and the choice of the first branching node fails when the path from qqq meets another terminal first; the paper handles these as separate cases. A second difficulty is the passage from arc sets to trees: minimum connecting sets are forests only because lengths are positive, and "the arcs of SSS involved in connecting" a set of terminals must be identified with a subtree. Finally the table recursion must be matched with the recurrence, including the restriction D[1]∈ED[1] \in ED[1]∈E that enumerates each splitting once.

Formalization scope

Nodes are a finite type V with a LinearOrder (the paper's "(ordered) set"; the goal holds for every order). The graph is a SimpleGraph V with decidable adjacency, arcs are unordered pairs Sym2 V, and lengths are ℓ : Sym2 V → ℝ. Every theorem assumes the paper's standing hypotheses of p. 195: all arcs of GGG have positive length (∀ e ∈ G.edgeSet, 0 < ℓ e) and GGG is connected. The paper allows several arcs between the same two nodes; the simple-graph model keeps one, which does not change any Steiner length since an optimal set uses only the shortest of parallel arcs. Connecting means reachability in the graph formed by the arcs of SSS. Steiner lengths, D(i,j)D(i,j)D(i,j) and all minima of the algorithm take values in WithTop ℝ, where ⊤ is +∞+\infty+∞, ⊤ + x = ⊤ and an empty minimum is ⊤; no real-valued infimum with a junk value is used. D(i,j)D(i,j)D(i,j) is a minimum over paths of GGG.

The goal assumes ∥Y∥≥3\|Y\| \ge 3∥Y∥≥3, the paper's own hypothesis (Appendix A, p. 205). For ∥Y∥=2\|Y\| = 2∥Y∥=2 Algorithm A as printed returns +∞+\infty+∞ because line (18) admits no set EEE; the two-node case is covered by milestone 2. The algorithm is defined from D(i,j)D(i,j)D(i,j), addition and minima only: a formalization in which tableA or algorithmA refers to Steiner lengths, or in which the goal only asserts v≥St⁡(Y)v \ge \operatorname{St}(Y)v≥St(Y), would be trivial and is ruled out. The loop order of lines (4)–(14) is replaced by recursion on ∥D∥\|D\|∥D∥, which the paper states is immaterial (p. 203).

Useful infrastructure: sums of lengths along walks and paths, reachability in edge-subgraphs, acyclicity of minimum connecting sets, and splitting a tree at a node. Contributions of these as reusable lemmas are welcome, as are proofs of individual milestones in any order. Tree reconstruction (§2, p. 200) and the empirical running times (p. 205) are out of scope.

Selected references

  • S. E. Dreyfus, R. A. Wagner, The Steiner Problem in Graphs, Networks 1(3):195–207, 1971. https://doi.org/10.1002/net.3230010302
  • E. N. Gilbert, H. O. Pollak, Steiner Minimal Trees, SIAM Journal on Applied Mathematics 16(1):1–29, 1968. https://doi.org/10.1137/0116001
  • R. W. Floyd, Algorithm 97: Shortest Path, Communications of the ACM 5(6):345, 1962. https://doi.org/10.1145/367766.368168
  • R. E. Erickson, C. L. Monma, A. F. Veinott Jr., Send-and-Split Method for Minimum-Concave-Cost Network Flows, Mathematics of Operations Research 12(4):634–664, 1987. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.12.4.634
  • A. Björklund, T. Husfeldt, P. Kaski, M. Koivisto, Fourier Meets Möbius: Fast Subset Convolution, STOC 2007, 67–74. https://doi.org/10.1145/1250790.1250801
10 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Control TheoryDynamic ProgrammingOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Monotone Mappings with Application in Dynamic Programming II: Convergence of the DP Algorithm under Uniform DecreaseResearch Paper

Motivation

Infinite-horizon sequential decision problems (deterministic optimal control, Markov decision processes, minimax control) share one computational question: does the dynamic programming (DP) algorithm, which starts from a terminal cost and repeatedly applies the Bellman operator, converge to the optimal cost? For discounted problems with bounded costs the answer is yes, by the contraction mapping theorem (Blackwell 1965; Denardo 1967). Without discounting and boundedness the answer depends on the sign structure of the problem. Strauch's negative programming model (Strauch 1966) and Blackwell's positive programming model behave differently, and in the former the DP algorithm can fail to converge to the optimal cost even for simple deterministic problems.

Bertsekas (1977) recast these models in one abstract framework: a monotone mapping HHH that encodes the one-stage problem, with no probabilistic or additive structure assumed. Two sign conditions organise the theory: uniform increase (Assumption I, containing Strauch's model) and uniform decrease (Assumption D, containing the deterministic version of Blackwell's positive model, e.g. deterministic problems with nonpositive stage costs). This mission formalizes the uniform-decrease half of Section 5: under D, the finite-horizon problems are solved by the DP algorithm, J∗J^*J∗ is the limit of the finite-horizon values, Bellman's equation holds, and the DP algorithm converges to J∗J^*J∗. The same framework became the basis of Bertsekas–Shreve's Stochastic Optimal Control: The Discrete-Time Case (1978) and of Bertsekas's Abstract Dynamic Programming (2013, 3rd ed. 2022).

Setting

States, controls, policies. SSS (nonempty) and CCC are sets. Each x∈Sx\in Sx∈S has a nonempty constraint set U(x)⊆CU(x)\subseteq CU(x)⊆C. MMM is the set of selectors μ:S→C\mu:S\to Cμ:S→C with μ(x)∈U(x)\mu(x)\in U(x)μ(x)∈U(x) for all xxx, and a policy is a sequence π={μ0,μ1,… }\pi=\{\mu_0,\mu_1,\dots\}π={μ0​,μ1​,…} of selectors. The policy is stationary if μk=μ\mu_k=\muμk​=μ for all kkk.

Functions and the mapping HHH. FFF is the set of functions J:S→[−∞,∞]J:S\to[-\infty,\infty]J:S→[−∞,∞], ordered pointwise, and eee is the constant function 111. A mapping H:S×C×F→[−∞,∞]H:S\times C\times F\to[-\infty,\infty]H:S×C×F→[−∞,∞] is given, and it is monotone: J≤J′J\le J'J≤J′ implies H(x,u,J)≤H(x,u,J′)H(x,u,J)\le H(x,u,J')H(x,u,J)≤H(x,u,J′) for every xxx and u∈U(x)u\in U(x)u∈U(x). It defines

Tμ(J)(x)=H(x,μ(x),J),T(J)(x)=inf⁡u∈U(x)H(x,u,J).T_\mu(J)(x)=H(x,\mu(x),J),\qquad T(J)(x)=\inf_{u\in U(x)}H(x,u,J).Tμ​(J)(x)=H(x,μ(x),J),T(J)(x)=u∈U(x)inf​H(x,u,J).

TkT^kTk is the kkk-fold composition, with T0T^0T0 the identity, and (Tμ0⋯TμN−1)(T_{\mu_0}\cdots T_{\mu_{N-1}})(Tμ0​​⋯TμN−1​​) applies TμN−1T_{\mu_{N-1}}TμN−1​​ first.

Costs. A terminal function Jˉ∈F\bar J\in FJˉ∈F with Jˉ(x)>−∞\bar J(x)>-\inftyJˉ(x)>−∞ is given. The cost of a policy, the optimal cost, the NNN-stage optimal cost and the limit of the DP algorithm are

Jπ=lim⁡N→∞(Tμ0⋯TμN−1)(Jˉ),J∗=inf⁡πJπ,JN=inf⁡π(Tμ0⋯TμN−1)(Jˉ),J∞=lim⁡N→∞TN(Jˉ),J_\pi=\lim_{N\to\infty}(T_{\mu_0}\cdots T_{\mu_{N-1}})(\bar J),\quad J^*=\inf_{\pi}J_\pi,\quad J_N=\inf_{\pi}(T_{\mu_0}\cdots T_{\mu_{N-1}})(\bar J),\quad J_\infty=\lim_{N\to\infty}T^N(\bar J),Jπ​=N→∞lim​(Tμ0​​⋯TμN−1​​)(Jˉ),J∗=πinf​Jπ​,JN​=πinf​(Tμ0​​⋯TμN−1​​)(Jˉ),J∞​=N→∞lim​TN(Jˉ),

all pointwise. JμJ_\muJμ​ denotes the cost of the stationary policy {μ,μ,… }\{\mu,\mu,\dots\}{μ,μ,…}.

Assumptions. D: H(x,u,Jˉ)≤Jˉ(x)H(x,u,\bar J)\le\bar J(x)H(x,u,Jˉ)≤Jˉ(x) for all xxx, u∈U(x)u\in U(x)u∈U(x). Under D every sequence above is nonincreasing, so the limits exist in [−∞,∞][-\infty,\infty][−∞,∞]. D.1: for every sequence with Jk+1≤Jk≤JˉJ_{k+1}\le J_k\le\bar JJk+1​≤Jk​≤Jˉ, lim⁡kH(x,u,Jk)=H(x,u,lim⁡kJk)\lim_k H(x,u,J_k)=H(x,u,\lim_k J_k)limk​H(x,u,Jk​)=H(x,u,limk​Jk​). D.2: there is α>0\alpha>0α>0 such that H(x,u,J)−αr≤H(x,u,J−re)≤H(x,u,J)H(x,u,J)-\alpha r\le H(x,u,J-re)\le H(x,u,J)H(x,u,J)−αr≤H(x,u,J−re)≤H(x,u,J) for all r>0r>0r>0 and J≤JˉJ\le\bar JJ≤Jˉ.

Formalization targets

Goal: convergence of the DP algorithm (Proposition 9)

If D holds, and either D.1 holds or JN=TN(Jˉ)J_N=T^N(\bar J)JN​=TN(Jˉ) for every N≥1N\ge1N≥1, then

J∞=J∗.J_\infty=J^*.J∞​=J∗.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 1. Under D, J∗(x)=lim⁡N→∞JN(x)J^*(x)=\lim_{N\to\infty}J_N(x)J∗(x)=limN→∞​JN​(x) for every xxx.
  2. Proposition 3. Under D, and either D.1 or (D.2 and TN(Jˉ)>−∞T^N(\bar J)>-\inftyTN(Jˉ)>−∞ everywhere), JN=TN(Jˉ)J_N=T^N(\bar J)JN​=TN(Jˉ) for a given N≥1N\ge1N≥1.
  3. Proposition 6. Under D and D.1, J∗=T(J∗)J^*=T(J^*)J∗=T(J∗), and every J′≤JˉJ'\le\bar JJ′≤Jˉ with J′≤T(J′)J'\le T(J')J′≤T(J′) satisfies J′≤J∗J'\le J^*J′≤J∗.
  4. Corollary 6.2. Under D and D.1, Jμ=Tμ(Jμ)J_\mu=T_\mu(J_\mu)Jμ​=Tμ​(Jμ​) for every stationary policy, and every J′≤JˉJ'\le\bar JJ′≤Jˉ with J′≤Tμ(J′)J'\le T_\mu(J')J′≤Tμ​(J′) satisfies J′≤JμJ'\le J_\muJ′≤Jμ​.
  5. Proposition 8. Under D and D.1, a stationary policy {μ∗,μ∗,… }\{\mu^*,\mu^*,\dots\}{μ∗,μ∗,…} is optimal if and only if Tμ∗(Jμ∗)=T(Jμ∗)T_{\mu^*}(J_{\mu^*})=T(J_{\mu^*})Tμ∗​(Jμ∗​)=T(Jμ∗​).

The goal is the paper's answer, in the uniform-decrease case, to the question it poses in the introduction: when is lim⁡NTN(Jˉ)=J∗\lim_N T^N(\bar J)=J^*limN​TN(Jˉ)=J∗?

Significance

The result. Proposition 9 justifies value iteration from Jˉ\bar JJˉ for every problem that fits Assumption D, including deterministic and stochastic control with nonpositive costs (reward maximization with nonnegative rewards) and minimax problems satisfying D.1. Propositions 6 and 8 characterise J∗J^*J∗ as the largest solution of Bellman's equation below Jˉ\bar JJˉ and give a verification test for stationary policies. The hypotheses are sharp in the sense the paper documents: its Counterexamples 2 and 3 show JN≠TN(Jˉ)J_N\ne T^N(\bar J)JN​=TN(Jˉ) when D.1 is dropped together with D.2 or with the finiteness condition TN(Jˉ)>−∞T^N(\bar J)>-\inftyTN(Jˉ)>−∞. Under the mirror assumption I, J∞=J∗J_\infty=J^*J∞​=J∗ can fail, so the asymmetry between the two sign conditions is part of the content.

Formalizing it. All results are proved in the 1977 paper and reappear in later monographs. No machine-checked version of this abstract framework is known. The platform's existing dynamic programming items are finite-state, real-valued and contraction-based, so this mission would add the first formal treatment of extended-real-valued, non-contractive dynamic programming, and a model definition that other results of the same theory can reuse.

Difficulty

The obvious argument for Proposition 9, "JN=TN(Jˉ)J_N=T^N(\bar J)JN​=TN(Jˉ) and JN→J∗J_N\to J^*JN​→J∗", hides two separate interchanges of limits and infima. Lemma 1 interchanges inf⁡π\inf_\piinfπ​ with lim⁡N\lim_NlimN​, which works only because every sequence is monotone in the right direction under D. Proposition 3 is where the work is: the NNN-stage infimum over policies must be matched by the iterated infimum TNT^NTN, which requires building near-optimal selectors stage by stage and passing a limit through HHH NNN times, using D.1, or controlling accumulated errors through D.2. The latter breaks down when values reach −∞-\infty−∞, which is why that branch needs TN(Jˉ)>−∞T^N(\bar J)>-\inftyTN(Jˉ)>−∞. All arithmetic is in [−∞,∞][-\infty,\infty][−∞,∞], where expressions such as ∞−∞\infty-\infty∞−∞ are not defined, and J∗J^*J∗, JNJ_NJN​, TN(Jˉ)T^N(\bar J)TN(Jˉ) may equal −∞-\infty−∞ even though Jˉ\bar JJˉ does not.

Formalization scope

The model is a Lean structure MonotoneDP.Decrease.Model S C with fields U, U_nonempty, H, mono, Jbar, Jbar_ne_bot and S_nonempty; FFF is S → EReal. Policies are ℕ → Selector, where a selector is a function with values in the constraint sets. TTT is an infimum over U x only, and J∗J^*J∗, JNJ_NJN​ are infima over admissible policies. JπJ_\piJπ​ and J∞J_\inftyJ∞​ are limUnder atTop; every theorem assumes D, under which both sequences are nonincreasing and converge, so these are the paper's limits. In D.1 both limits are limUnder. D.2 carries its scalar as a parameter, and "D.2 holds" is ∃ α, AssumptionD2 α. Only real scalars are ever subtracted from extended reals.

JNJ_NJN​ is defined for every NNN, and Propositions 3 and 9 quantify over N≥1N\ge1N≥1 as the paper does. In Proposition 3 the condition TN(Jˉ)>−∞T^N(\bar J)>-\inftyTN(Jˉ)>−∞ belongs to the D.2 branch only. No hypothesis beyond the page is added. Nonempty constraint sets and Jˉ>−∞\bar J>-\inftyJˉ>−∞ are the paper's standing assumptions, stated in the model, not in the theorems. Without nonempty constraint sets there would be no policies, J∗J^*J∗ and JNJ_NJN​ would be +∞+\infty+∞, and several statements would hold trivially; the model rules this out.

Useful contributions: general lemmas about monotone sequences in EReal (interchanging ⨅ and limits), the monotonicity facts (25) and TN+1(Jˉ)≤TN(Jˉ)T^{N+1}(\bar J)\le T^N(\bar J)TN+1(Jˉ)≤TN(Jˉ) under D, and reusable constructions of near-optimal selectors. Corollary 6.1 (the finite-state D.2 variant) is not included.

Selected references

  • D. P. Bertsekas, Monotone mappings with application in dynamic programming, SIAM J. Control Optim. 15(3), 438–464, 1977. https://doi.org/10.1137/0315031
  • E. V. Denardo, Contraction mappings in the theory underlying dynamic programming, SIAM Review 9(2), 165–177, 1967. https://doi.org/10.1137/1009030
  • R. E. Strauch, Negative dynamic programming, Ann. Math. Statist. 37(4), 871–890, 1966. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177699147
  • D. Blackwell, Discounted dynamic programming, Ann. Math. Statist. 36(1), 226–235, 1965. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177700285
  • D. P. Bertsekas, Abstract Dynamic Programming, 3rd ed., Athena Scientific, 2022. https://www.mit.edu/~dimitrib/abstractdp_MIT.html
8 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationFunctional AnalysisOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

A Three-Operator Splitting Scheme and its Optimization Applications 3: Accelerated Convergence under Strong MonotonicityResearch Paper

Motivation

Many problems in convex optimization, variational inequalities and signal processing reduce to finding a zero of a sum of three monotone operators, one of which is single-valued and smooth. Davis and Yin (Set-Valued Var. Anal. 25, 2017) introduced a splitting scheme that evaluates each of the three operators separately: the two set-valued ones through their resolvents, the single-valued one through a forward step. With a fixed stepsize, their Algorithm 1 converges weakly but can be slow: the paper's Section 3.4 constructs examples where the squared distance of the iterates to the solution decays no faster than (k+1)−(1+ϵ)(k+1)^{-(1+\epsilon)}(k+1)−(1+ϵ) for every ϵ>0\epsilon > 0ϵ>0.

When one of the operators is strongly monotone (for example the subdifferential of a strongly convex function), first-order splitting methods can be accelerated by letting the stepsize shrink like 1/k1/k1/k; the paper relates its stepsizes to those of Chambolle and Pock's accelerated primal–dual method (J. Math. Imaging Vis. 40, 2011, Algorithm 2) and of Boţ, Csetnek, Heinrich and Hendrich (Math. Program. 150, 2015, Algorithm 5). Section 3.3 of Davis–Yin carries this device over to three-operator splitting and obtains an O(1/(k+1)2)O(1/(k+1)^2)O(1/(k+1)2) rate for the squared distance. This mission formalizes that result.

Setting

Let HHH be a real Hilbert space. A set-valued operator A:H→2HA : H \to 2^HA:H→2H is monotone if ⟨x−y,u−v⟩≥0\langle x - y, u - v\rangle \ge 0⟨x−y,u−v⟩≥0 for all u∈Axu \in Axu∈Ax, v∈Ayv \in Ayv∈Ay, and maximal monotone if its graph is not properly contained in the graph of another monotone operator. It is μ\muμ-strongly monotone if ⟨x−y,u−v⟩≥μ∥x−y∥2\langle x - y, u - v\rangle \ge \mu\|x-y\|^2⟨x−y,u−v⟩≥μ∥x−y∥2 for all such pairs. A single-valued C:H→HC : H \to HC:H→H is β\betaβ-cocoercive if β∥Cx−Cy∥2≤⟨Cx−Cy,x−y⟩\beta\|Cx - Cy\|^2 \le \langle Cx - Cy, x - y\rangleβ∥Cx−Cy∥2≤⟨Cx−Cy,x−y⟩, and LCL_CLC​-Lipschitz if ∥Cx−Cy∥≤LC∥x−y∥\|Cx - Cy\| \le L_C\|x - y\|∥Cx−Cy∥≤LC​∥x−y∥.

The problem is to find x∗∈zer⁡(A+B+C)x^* \in \operatorname{zer}(A + B + C)x∗∈zer(A+B+C), that is, 0∈Ax∗+Bx∗+Cx∗0 \in Ax^* + Bx^* + Cx^*0∈Ax∗+Bx∗+Cx∗, where AAA, BBB are maximal monotone and CCC is monotone and single-valued. For γ>0\gamma > 0γ>0 the resolvent JγA=(I+γA)−1J_{\gamma A} = (I + \gamma A)^{-1}JγA​=(I+γA)−1 is the map with x∈JγAx+γA(JγAx)x \in J_{\gamma A}x + \gamma A(J_{\gamma A}x)x∈JγA​x+γA(JγA​x).

Algorithm 3 fixes stepsizes (γk)k≥0⊆(0,∞)(\gamma_k)_{k\ge 0} \subseteq (0,\infty)(γk​)k≥0​⊆(0,∞) and an initial point xA0∈Hx_A^0 \in HxA0​∈H, sets xB0=Jγ0B(xA0)x_B^0 = J_{\gamma_0 B}(x_A^0)xB0​=Jγ0​B​(xA0​), uB0=γ0−1(xA0−xB0)u_B^0 = \gamma_0^{-1}(x_A^0 - x_B^0)uB0​=γ0−1​(xA0​−xB0​), and iterates for k≥0k \ge 0k≥0

xBk+1=JγkB(xAk+γkuBk),uBk+1=1γk(xAk+γkuBk−xBk+1),xAk+1=Jγk+1A(xBk+1−γk+1uBk+1−γk+1CxBk+1).x_B^{k+1} = J_{\gamma_k B}(x_A^k + \gamma_k u_B^k),\quad u_B^{k+1} = \tfrac{1}{\gamma_k}(x_A^k + \gamma_k u_B^k - x_B^{k+1}),\quad x_A^{k+1} = J_{\gamma_{k+1}A}(x_B^{k+1} - \gamma_{k+1}u_B^{k+1} - \gamma_{k+1}Cx_B^{k+1}).xBk+1​=Jγk​B​(xAk​+γk​uBk​),uBk+1​=γk​1​(xAk​+γk​uBk​−xBk+1​),xAk+1​=Jγk+1​A​(xBk+1​−γk+1​uBk+1​−γk+1​CxBk+1​).

The stepsize changes in the middle of an iteration. Two stepsize rules are considered, each defined recursively from γ0\gamma_0γ0​:

(3.6)γk+1=−2γk2μCη+(2γk2μCη)2+4(1+2γkμB)γk22(1+2γkμB),(3.7)γk+1=γk1+2γk(μB−γkLC2/2).\text{(3.6)}\quad \gamma_{k+1} = \frac{-2\gamma_k^2\mu_C\eta + \sqrt{(2\gamma_k^2\mu_C\eta)^2 + 4(1+2\gamma_k\mu_B)\gamma_k^2}}{2(1+2\gamma_k\mu_B)}, \qquad \text{(3.7)}\quad \gamma_{k+1} = \frac{\gamma_k}{\sqrt{1 + 2\gamma_k(\mu_B - \gamma_kL_C^2/2)}}.(3.6)γk+1​=2(1+2γk​μB​)−2γk2​μC​η+(2γk2​μC​η)2+4(1+2γk​μB​)γk2​​​,(3.7)γk+1​=1+2γk​(μB​−γk​LC2​/2)​γk​​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.3, both parts

Let BBB be μB\mu_BμB​-strongly monotone with μB≥0\mu_B \ge 0μB​≥0.

  1. If CCC is β\betaβ-cocoercive and μC\mu_CμC​-strongly monotone (μC>0\mu_C > 0μC​>0), η∈(0,1)\eta \in (0,1)η∈(0,1), γ0∈(0,2β(1−η))\gamma_0 \in (0, 2\beta(1-\eta))γ0​∈(0,2β(1−η)) and the stepsizes follow (3.6), then for every x∗∈zer⁡(A+B+C)x^* \in \operatorname{zer}(A+B+C)x∗∈zer(A+B+C)
∃K ∀k≥0:∥xBk−x∗∥2≤K(k+1)2.\exists K\ \forall k \ge 0:\quad \|x_B^k - x^*\|^2 \le \frac{K}{(k+1)^2}.∃K ∀k≥0:∥xBk​−x∗∥2≤(k+1)2K​.
  1. If CCC is LCL_CLC​-Lipschitz, μB>0\mu_B > 0μB​>0, γ0∈(0,2μB/LC2)\gamma_0 \in (0, 2\mu_B/L_C^2)γ0​∈(0,2μB​/LC2​) and the stepsizes follow (3.7), the same conclusion holds.

The goal asserts the shape of the rate only; the constant KKK is not fixed.

Milestones

  • Proposition 3.1, Parts 1 and 2: the one-step inequalities (3.9) and (3.10) for Algorithm 3 with arbitrary admissible stepsizes.
  • Stepsize facts from the proof of Theorem 3.3: the identities that make (3.9) and (3.10) telescope, the monotonicity of the stepsizes (3.6), and the limits (k+1)γk→1/(μCη+μB)(k+1)\gamma_k \to 1/(\mu_C\eta + \mu_B)(k+1)γk​→1/(μC​η+μB​) for (3.6) and (k+1)γk→1/μB(k+1)\gamma_k \to 1/\mu_B(k+1)γk​→1/μB​ for (3.7).

Significance

The theorem shows that strong monotonicity of BBB or CCC can be converted into a quadratically decaying distance bound without knowledge of the solution, with stepsizes that are computable from the strong monotonicity and cocoercivity (or Lipschitz) constants alone. Since the rate is established for xBkx_B^kxBk​, it applies directly to splitting schemes for strongly convex composite problems min⁡f+g+h\min f + g + hminf+g+h with hhh smooth, where xBkx_B^kxBk​ is the proximal point of ggg.

The result is proved in the paper; no machine-checked version is known. The formalization adds a precise statement of the admissible parameter ranges, a check of the index conventions of a scheme whose stepsize changes mid-iteration, and a correction of the one-step inequalities at the first iteration (see Formalization scope). The stepsize limits are statements about explicit real recursions and are of independent use for other accelerated schemes.

Difficulty

The one-step inequalities (3.9) and (3.10) are long but elementary chains of inner-product identities and Young's inequality; the work lies in bookkeeping two stepsizes per iteration. The rate itself does not follow from the one-step inequality alone: telescoping gives a bound of the form ∥xBk−x∗∥2≲γk2\|x_B^{k}-x^*\|^2 \lesssim \gamma_k^2∥xBk​−x∗∥2≲γk2​, and one must then show γk\gamma_kγk​ decays exactly like 1/k1/k1/k. The rules (3.6) and (3.7) are nonlinear recursions without closed form, so their asymptotics require a Stolz–Cesàro type argument, which is not available in Mathlib under that name. Choosing a stepsize sequence of the form c/kc/kc/k instead is a different algorithm and not covered by the theorem.

Formalization scope

  • HHH is an arbitrary real Hilbert space (InnerProductSpace ℝ H, CompleteSpace H), not a Euclidean space.
  • Resolvents are not constructed. They are families JA JB : ℝ → H → H required to satisfy the resolvent inclusion γ−1(x−J(γ)x)∈A(J(γ)x)\gamma^{-1}(x - J(\gamma)x) \in A(J(\gamma)x)γ−1(x−J(γ)x)∈A(J(γ)x) for every γ>0\gamma > 0γ>0; for maximal monotone operators such maps exist and are unique, so nothing is lost.
  • Algorithm 3 is a single recursive definition of the triple (xAk,xBk,uBk)(x_A^k, x_B^k, u_B^k)(xAk​,xBk​,uBk​) from xA0x_A^0xA0​, the stepsizes, the resolvent families and CCC; the paper's loop index k=1,2,…k = 1, 2, \dotsk=1,2,… matches recursion (3.8) shifted by one.
  • The stepsize rules (3.6) and (3.7) are recursive real sequences, used verbatim; each theorem assumes the paper's parameter ranges.
  • O(1/(k+1)2)O(1/(k+1)^2)O(1/(k+1)2) is rendered as ∃K ∀k, ∥xBk−x∗∥2≤K/(k+1)2\exists K\,\forall k,\ \|x_B^k - x^*\|^2 \le K/(k+1)^2∃K∀k, ∥xBk​−x∗∥2≤K/(k+1)2, with KKK chosen after all data (initial point, operators, constants, γ0\gamma_0γ0​, x∗x^*x∗) and before kkk. No explicit constant is stated.
  • Strong monotonicity of CCC means μC>0\mu_C > 0μC​>0; only μB=0\mu_B = 0μB​=0 is allowed, as on the page. With μB=μC=0\mu_B = \mu_C = 0μB​=μC​=0 rule (3.6) keeps γk\gamma_kγk​ constant and the rate fails, so a formalization allowing μC=0\mu_C = 0μC​=0 would be false. In Part 2, LC>0L_C > 0LC​>0 is assumed so that the stepsize interval is meaningful, and CCC is assumed monotone, as in problem (1.1) and as used in the paper's proof of (3.10).
  • The paper states (3.9) and (3.10) for all k≥0k \ge 0k≥0; at k=0k = 0k=0 the initial point xA0x_A^0xA0​ is not a resolvent output, and both inequalities fail in general. The milestones state them for k≥1k \ge 1k≥1. Theorem 3.3 is unaffected, since finitely many initial terms do not change an O(⋅)O(\cdot)O(⋅) bound.
  • The display γk2−γk+12=γkγk+1(2γkμB+2γk+1μCη)\gamma_k^2 - \gamma_{k+1}^2 = \gamma_k\gamma_{k+1}(2\gamma_k\mu_B + 2\gamma_{k+1}\mu_C\eta)γk2​−γk+12​=γk​γk+1​(2γk​μB​+2γk+1​μC​η) on p. 845 has γk\gamma_kγk​ and γk+1\gamma_{k+1}γk+1​ swapped inside the bracket; the milestone states the corrected identity γkγk+1(2γk+1μB+2γkμCη)\gamma_k\gamma_{k+1}(2\gamma_{k+1}\mu_B + 2\gamma_k\mu_C\eta)γk​γk+1​(2γk+1​μB​+2γk​μC​η).
  • A trivializing formalization, such as one in which the resolvent hypothesis is unsatisfiable, the stepsize interval is empty, or the rate constant may depend on kkk, is ruled out: the hypotheses are met by A=0A = 0A=0, B=μBIB = \mu_B IB=μB​I (with resolvents JγA=IJ_{\gamma A} = IJγA​=I, JγB=(1+γμB)−1IJ_{\gamma B} = (1+\gamma\mu_B)^{-1}IJγB​=(1+γμB​)−1I) and C=cIC = cIC=cI with c>0c > 0c>0, and KKK is quantified before kkk.

Contributions are welcome at every level: proofs of the real-sequence milestones (a general Stolz–Cesàro lemma would be reusable well beyond this mission), of the two one-step inequalities, and of the telescoping argument that assembles the goal.

Selected references

  • D. Davis and W. Yin, A Three-Operator Splitting Scheme and its Optimization Applications, Set-Valued and Variational Analysis 25 (2017), 829–858. https://doi.org/10.1007/s11228-017-0421-z (preprint: https://arxiv.org/abs/1504.01032)
  • R. I. Boţ, E. R. Csetnek, A. Heinrich and C. Hendrich, On the convergence rate improvement of a primal-dual splitting algorithm for solving monotone inclusion problems, Mathematical Programming 150 (2015), 251–279. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-014-0766-0
  • A. Chambolle and T. Pock, A First-Order Primal-Dual Algorithm for Convex Problems with Applications to Imaging, Journal of Mathematical Imaging and Vision 40 (2011), 120–145. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10851-010-0251-1
  • H. H. Bauschke and P. L. Combettes, Convex Analysis and Monotone Operator Theory in Hilbert Spaces, 2nd ed., Springer, 2017. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-319-48311-5
11 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

On Polyhedral Approximations of the Second-Order Cone III: Closeness of the Relaxed Feasible SetResearch Paper

Motivation

Conic quadratic problems (also called second-order cone programs) arise directly in applications such as contact problems with Coulomb friction, and a wide range of nonlinear convex problems can be rewritten in this form (Lobo, Vandenberghe, Boyd and Lebret 1998). Interior-point methods solve them in polynomial time, but around 2000 the available software for conic quadratic problems handled far fewer variables than linear programming software. Ben-Tal and Nemirovski (2001) therefore asked whether a conic quadratic problem can be replaced by a linear program of comparable size. Their construction replaces each second-order cone by a polyhedral cone that is exact up to a factor 1+ε1+\varepsilon1+ε. The feasible set of the resulting linear program, projected back to the original variables, lies between the feasible set of the original problem and that of its ε\varepsilonε-relaxation.

This sandwich is only useful if the relaxed problem is close to the original one, and in general it is not: the paper notes that (CQP) can be infeasible while every relaxation with ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 is feasible. Proposition 4.1 of the paper, the target of this mission, gives a sufficient condition under which the two feasible sets are O(ε)O(\varepsilon)O(ε)-close.

Setting

For y∈Rky\in\mathbb R^ky∈Rk let ∥y∥2=yTy\|y\|_2=\sqrt{y^Ty}∥y∥2​=yTy​ be the Euclidean norm. A conic quadratic problem in the variable x∈Rnx\in\mathbb R^nx∈Rn is

(CQP)min⁡x{eTx∣Ax≥b, ∥Aℓx−bℓ∥2≤cℓTx−dℓ, ℓ=1,…,m},\text{(CQP)}\qquad \min_x\bigl\{e^Tx \bigm| Ax\ge b,\ \|A_\ell x-b_\ell\|_2\le c_\ell^Tx-d_\ell,\ \ell=1,\dots,m\bigr\},(CQP)xmin​{eTx​Ax≥b, ∥Aℓ​x−bℓ​∥2​≤cℓT​x−dℓ​, ℓ=1,…,m},

where AAA is a k0×nk_0\times nk0​×n matrix and b∈Rk0b\in\mathbb R^{k_0}b∈Rk0​ (the inequality Ax≥bAx\ge bAx≥b is componentwise), and for each ℓ\ellℓ the matrix AℓA_\ellAℓ​ is kℓ×nk_\ell\times nkℓ​×n, bℓ∈Rkℓb_\ell\in\mathbb R^{k_\ell}bℓ​∈Rkℓ​, cℓ∈Rnc_\ell\in\mathbb R^ncℓ​∈Rn and dℓ∈Rd_\ell\in\mathbb Rdℓ​∈R. For ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 the ε\varepsilonε-relaxation is

(CQPε)min⁡x{eTx∣Ax≥b, ∥Aℓx−bℓ∥2≤(1+ε)[cℓTx−dℓ], ℓ=1,…,m}.\text{(CQP}_\varepsilon)\qquad \min_x\bigl\{e^Tx \bigm| Ax\ge b,\ \|A_\ell x-b_\ell\|_2\le (1+\varepsilon)\bigl[c_\ell^Tx-d_\ell\bigr],\ \ell=1,\dots,m\bigr\}.(CQPε​)xmin​{eTx​Ax≥b, ∥Aℓ​x−bℓ​∥2​≤(1+ε)[cℓT​x−dℓ​], ℓ=1,…,m}.

Feas(P)\mathrm{Feas}(P)Feas(P) denotes the feasible set of a problem (P)(P)(P); in Lean these are feas P and feasRelaxed P ε, subsets of Fin n → ℝ, for a problem datum P : CQP n k₀ m.

Two conditions on (CQP) are used.

  1. Strict feasibility: there are xˉ\bar xxˉ and r>0r>0r>0 with Axˉ≥bA\bar x\ge bAxˉ≥b and ∥Aℓxˉ−bℓ∥2≤[cℓTxˉ−dℓ]−r\|A_\ell\bar x-b_\ell\|_2\le[c_\ell^T\bar x-d_\ell]-r∥Aℓ​xˉ−bℓ​∥2​≤[cℓT​xˉ−dℓ​]−r for every ℓ\ellℓ (IsStrictlyFeasible P x̄ r).
  2. Semiboundedness: there is RRR such that every feasible xxx of (CQP) satisfies cℓTx−dℓ≤Rc_\ell^Tx-d_\ell\le RcℓT​x−dℓ​≤R for every ℓ\ellℓ (IsSemibounded P R).

Put γ(ε)=Rε/r\gamma(\varepsilon)=R\varepsilon/rγ(ε)=Rε/r.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 4.1

If (CQP) has m≥1m\ge1m≥1 conic constraints and is strictly feasible and semibounded, then for every ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 with γ(ε)<1\gamma(\varepsilon)<1γ(ε)<1,

γ(ε)xˉ+(1−γ(ε)) Feas(CQPε) ⊆ Feas(CQP) ⊆ Feas(CQPε).(14)\gamma(\varepsilon)\bar x+(1-\gamma(\varepsilon))\,\mathrm{Feas}(\mathrm{CQP}_\varepsilon)\ \subseteq\ \mathrm{Feas}(\mathrm{CQP})\ \subseteq\ \mathrm{Feas}(\mathrm{CQP}_\varepsilon). \tag{14}γ(ε)xˉ+(1−γ(ε))Feas(CQPε​) ⊆ Feas(CQP) ⊆ Feas(CQPε​).(14)

The left-hand side is the image of Feas(CQPε)\mathrm{Feas}(\mathrm{CQP}_\varepsilon)Feas(CQPε​) under y↦γ(ε)xˉ+(1−γ(ε))yy\mapsto\gamma(\varepsilon)\bar x+(1-\gamma(\varepsilon))yy↦γ(ε)xˉ+(1−γ(ε))y, not a Minkowski sum.

Milestones

The milestones follow the paper's proof in order.

  1. The right inclusion Feas(CQP)⊆Feas(CQPε)\mathrm{Feas}(\mathrm{CQP})\subseteq\mathrm{Feas}(\mathrm{CQP}_\varepsilon)Feas(CQP)⊆Feas(CQPε​) for ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0.
  2. For y∈Feas(CQPε)y\in\mathrm{Feas}(\mathrm{CQP}_\varepsilon)y∈Feas(CQPε​) and tℓ=cℓTy−dℓt_\ell=c_\ell^Ty-d_\elltℓ​=cℓT​y−dℓ​, every δ∈[0,1]\delta\in[0,1]δ∈[0,1] with δ≥εtℓ/(r+εtℓ)\delta\ge\varepsilon t_\ell/(r+\varepsilon t_\ell)δ≥εtℓ​/(r+εtℓ​) for all ℓ\ellℓ makes xδ=(1−δ)y+δxˉx_\delta=(1-\delta)y+\delta\bar xxδ​=(1−δ)y+δxˉ feasible for (CQP).
  3. Under semiboundedness, the same δ\deltaδ satisfies (1−δ)tℓ≤R(1-\delta)t_\ell\le R(1−δ)tℓ​≤R for all ℓ\ellℓ.
  4. If δ=εt/(r+εt)\delta=\varepsilon t/(r+\varepsilon t)δ=εt/(r+εt) with t≥0t\ge0t≥0, (1−δ)t≤R(1-\delta)t\le R(1−δ)t≤R and γ(ε)<1\gamma(\varepsilon)<1γ(ε)<1, then t≤R/(1−γ(ε))t\le R/(1-\gamma(\varepsilon))t≤R/(1−γ(ε)) and δ≤γ(ε)\delta\le\gamma(\varepsilon)δ≤γ(ε).

Significance

The result. Proposition 4.1 turns the qualitative sandwich "exact ⊆ polyhedral ⊆ relaxed" into a quantitative statement. When a problem is strictly feasible with margin rrr and its conic right-hand sides are bounded by RRR on the feasible set, the relaxed feasible set, shrunk towards xˉ\bar xxˉ by 1−γ(ε)1-\gamma(\varepsilon)1−γ(ε), lies inside the exact one. The error of the relaxation is thus controlled by γ(ε)=Rε/r\gamma(\varepsilon)=R\varepsilon/rγ(ε)=Rε/r, which is linear in ε\varepsilonε. Together with the paper's main theorem, that a polyhedral ε\varepsilonε-approximation of the Lorentz cone with O(kln⁡(1/ε))O(k\ln(1/\varepsilon))O(kln(1/ε)) variables and inequalities exists, this measures how well a linear program of moderate size approximates the conic problem. The paper uses it this way for the examples in its introduction.

The formalization. The proposition is proved in the paper; no machine-checked version is known. This mission produces a Lean formalization of conic quadratic problems and their relaxations with the Euclidean norm, together with the strict feasibility and semiboundedness conditions and the proof. The Lorentz-cone approximation results of the same paper are the subject of the companion missions I and II of this series.

Difficulty

The right inclusion is immediate. The left inclusion does not follow from convexity alone. A relaxed-feasible point yyy may violate every conic constraint of (CQP), and nothing about yyy bounds how far it is from Feas(CQP)\mathrm{Feas}(\mathrm{CQP})Feas(CQP). The needed information comes from semiboundedness, which constrains only feasible points of (CQP). That hypothesis therefore cannot be applied to yyy itself, and the shrink factor γ(ε)\gamma(\varepsilon)γ(ε) must be obtained without any bound on cℓTy−dℓc_\ell^Ty-d_\ellcℓT​y−dℓ​ given in advance. The obvious attempt, bounding the violation at yyy by εR\varepsilon RεR, fails for exactly this reason.

Formalization scope

  • Vectors of Rn\mathbb R^nRn are Fin n → ℝ; the mmm conic constraints are indexed by Fin m (0-based) with a dependent family of matrices (ℓ : Fin m) → Matrix (Fin (k ℓ)) (Fin n) ℝ, so the row sizes kℓk_\ellkℓ​ may differ. The norm is written out as eucNorm y = √(∑ i, y i ^ 2); Mathlib's norm on Fin k → ℝ is the sup norm and is not used.
  • Only feasible sets are compared; the objective eee is carried as data but plays no role.
  • Correction 1. In hypothesis (i) the page prints [cℓTx−dℓ]−r[c_\ell^Tx-d_\ell]-r[cℓT​x−dℓ​]−r without the bar over xxx. The proof uses cℓTxˉ−dℓ−rc_\ell^T\bar x-d_\ell-rcℓT​xˉ−dℓ​−r, which is what IsStrictlyFeasible states.
  • Correction 2. The goal assumes m≥1m\ge1m≥1, which the paper leaves implicit. With m=0m=0m=0, semiboundedness is vacuous and RRR may be negative, so γ(ε)<0\gamma(\varepsilon)<0γ(ε)<0. Then the map y↦γxˉ+(1−γ)yy\mapsto\gamma\bar x+(1-\gamma)yy↦γxˉ+(1−γ)y extrapolates beyond yyy and can leave {Ax≥b}\{Ax\ge b\}{Ax≥b}. An example is n=1n=1n=1, A=[1]A=[1]A=[1], b=0b=0b=0, xˉ=1\bar x=1xˉ=1, y=0y=0y=0, R=−1R=-1R=−1, r=ε=1r=\varepsilon=1r=ε=1. For m≥1m\ge1m≥1 the hypotheses force R≥r>0R\ge r>0R≥r>0.
  • ε\varepsilonε ranges over all ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 with γ(ε)<1\gamma(\varepsilon)<1γ(ε)<1, as in the paper; it is not restricted to (0,1](0,1](0,1].
  • The second milestone is stated for every δ∈[0,1]\delta\in[0,1]δ∈[0,1] that dominates all ratios εtℓ/(r+εtℓ)\varepsilon t_\ell/(r+\varepsilon t_\ell)εtℓ​/(r+εtℓ​), rather than only for the paper's δ=max⁡ℓ\delta=\max_\ellδ=maxℓ​. This includes the paper's case.
  • The goal cannot be satisfied trivially. The strict feasibility and semiboundedness hypotheses are jointly satisfiable (for example n=m=1n=m=1n=m=1, the constraint ∣x∣≤1|x|\le 1∣x∣≤1 written as ∥x∥2≤1\|x\|_2\le 1∥x∥2​≤1, xˉ=0\bar x=0xˉ=0, r=1r=1r=1, R=1R=1R=1), and the conclusion is the full two-sided inclusion with the paper's γ(ε)\gamma(\varepsilon)γ(ε), not the existence of some contraction factor.
  • Needed infrastructure: Euclidean-norm convexity (the triangle inequality and homogeneity for eucNorm, or a transfer to EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin k)) and linearity of Matrix.mulVec and dotProduct. A convexity lemma for feas P would be reusable beyond this mission, and contributions of it are welcome.

Selected references

  • A. Ben-Tal and A. Nemirovski, On Polyhedral Approximations of the Second-Order Cone, Mathematics of Operations Research 26(2):193–205, 2001. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.26.2.193.10561
  • M. S. Lobo, L. Vandenberghe, S. Boyd and H. Lebret, Applications of Second-Order Cone Programming, Linear Algebra and its Applications 284:193–228, 1998. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0024-3795(98)10032-0
  • Yu. Nesterov and A. Nemirovski, Interior-Point Polynomial Algorithms in Convex Programming, SIAM, 1994. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611970791
7 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
OptimizationProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

On Minimizing a Convex Function Subject to Linear Inequalities III: The Expected Cost of a Linear Program with Random Coefficients Is ConvexResearch Paper

Motivation

A linear program is solved with known data, but in planning problems the data are often only known in distribution when the main decision is taken: demands, yields and requirements are revealed later, and a corrective action is taken after they are. E. M. L. Beale's 1955 paper On Minimizing a Convex Function Subject to Linear Inequalities formulates this situation in its §5, "Linear Programming with Random Coefficients", as what is now called a two-stage stochastic linear program with recourse. Beale's motivating example is the transportation problem of Hitchcock (1941) with random requirements at the destinations, where every unit of shortage or excess incurs a loss. The same model was put forward in the same year by Dantzig, Linear Programming under Uncertainty (Management Science, 1955), as the paper's note added in proof acknowledges.

Timeline:

  • 1955. Beale (§5, Theorems 2 and 3) and Dantzig independently introduce two-stage linear programs with random data; Beale proves that the expected cost is convex in the first-stage decision, and that the cost is convex in the random data for fixed decision.
  • 1967. Walkup and Wets, Stochastic Programs with Recourse, study the domain of the expected recourse function and its properties under fixed recourse.
  • 1974. Wets, Stochastic Programs with Fixed Recourse: The Equivalent Deterministic Program, gives the systematic treatment of convexity, finiteness and polyhedrality of the expected recourse function, now textbook material (Birge and Louveaux, Introduction to Stochastic Programming, Ch. 3).

Setting

Constants c∈Rnc\in\mathbb R^nc∈Rn, f∈Rpf\in\mathbb R^pf∈Rp and an m×pm\times pm×p matrix D=(dik)D=(d_{ik})D=(dik​) are given. The data A=(αij)A=(\alpha_{ij})A=(αij​), an m×nm\times nm×n matrix, and β∈Rm\beta\in\mathbb R^mβ∈Rm are random variables on a probability space (Ω,P)(\Omega,P)(Ω,P): their distribution is known when the first-stage decision x∈Rnx\in\mathbb R^nx∈Rn, x≥0x\ge0x≥0, is chosen, and their values are known when the second-stage decision y∈Rpy\in\mathbb R^py∈Rp, y≥0y\ge0y≥0, is chosen. The cost is

C=c′x+f′y,Ax+Dy=β.(5.3),(5.4)C=c'x+f'y,\qquad Ax+Dy=\beta. \qquad(5.3),(5.4)C=c′x+f′y,Ax+Dy=β.(5.3),(5.4)

For a right-hand side b∈Rmb\in\mathbb R^mb∈Rm the second-stage value is

Q(b)=min⁡{f′y:y≥0, Dy=b},Q(b)=\min\{f'y : y\ge0,\ Dy=b\},Q(b)=min{f′y:y≥0, Dy=b},

and for fixed data the cost of a first-stage decision is C(x)=c′x+Q(β−Ax)C(x)=c'x+Q(\beta-Ax)C(x)=c′x+Q(β−Ax). The expected cost is

E(C)(x)=∫Ω(c′x+Q(β(ω)−A(ω)x)) dP(ω).E(C)(x)=\int_\Omega \bigl(c'x+Q(\beta(\omega)-A(\omega)x)\bigr)\,dP(\omega).E(C)(x)=∫Ω​(c′x+Q(β(ω)−A(ω)x))dP(ω).

The problem is to choose x≥0x\ge0x≥0 minimising E(C)E(C)E(C). In Lean the value is secondStageValue D f b, the cost is cost c f D A β x, and the expected cost is expectedCost P c f D A β x, all in the namespace BealeConvexMin.RandomLP.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2 (p. 182)

Assume that for every x≥0x\ge0x≥0 the second-stage minimum is attained for almost every outcome and that ω↦C(x,ω)\omega\mapsto C(x,\omega)ω↦C(x,ω) is integrable. Then

E(C)(λ1x1+λ2x2)≤λ1E(C)(x1)+λ2E(C)(x2)(x1,x2≥0, λ1,λ2≥0, λ1+λ2=1),E(C)(\lambda_1x_1+\lambda_2x_2)\le\lambda_1E(C)(x_1)+\lambda_2E(C)(x_2)\qquad(x_1,x_2\ge0,\ \lambda_1,\lambda_2\ge0,\ \lambda_1+\lambda_2=1),E(C)(λ1​x1​+λ2​x2​)≤λ1​E(C)(x1​)+λ2​E(C)(x2​)(x1​,x2​≥0, λ1​,λ2​≥0, λ1​+λ2​=1),

that is, E(C)E(C)E(C) is convex on the non-negative orthant. The statement fixes no distribution class: it is claimed for any known distribution of (A,β)(A,\beta)(A,β).

Milestones

  1. Pointwise convexity (last display of the proof of Theorem 2, p. 182): for fixed data (A,β)(A,\beta)(A,β), with the minimum attained at every x≥0x\ge0x≥0,
C(λ1x1+λ2x2)≤λ1C(x1)+λ2C(x2).C(\lambda_1x_1+\lambda_2x_2)\le\lambda_1C(x_1)+\lambda_2C(x_2).C(λ1​x1​+λ2​x2​)≤λ1​C(x1​)+λ2​C(x2​).
  1. Theorem 3 (p. 182): for fixed xxx, the cost (A,β)↦c′x+Q(β−Ax)(A,\beta)\mapsto c'x+Q(\beta-Ax)(A,β)↦c′x+Q(β−Ax) is jointly convex on every convex set of data on which the second-stage minimum is attained.
  2. Eqs. (5.5)–(5.6) (p. 182): for a finitely supported distribution, A=ArA=A_rA=Ar​ and β=βr\beta=\beta_rβ=βr​ with probability prp_rpr​, the value E(C)(x)E(C)(x)E(C)(x) is the minimum of c′x+∑rprf′yrc'x+\sum_r p_r f'y_rc′x+∑r​pr​f′yr​ over non-negative yry_ryr​ with Arx+Dyr=βrA_rx+Dy_r=\beta_rAr​x+Dyr​=βr​ for all rrr; minimising E(C)E(C)E(C) is then a linear program.

Significance

The result. Theorem 2 is the basic structural fact of two-stage stochastic linear programming: the first-stage problem is a convex program in xxx, whatever the distribution of the data. It is what makes local optimality global for the first-stage problem, what justifies cutting-plane and decomposition methods that approximate E(C)E(C)E(C) from below by supporting hyperplanes, and what makes sample-average approximations convex programs. Theorem 3, joint convexity in the data, gives through Jensen's inequality the comparison between the stochastic problem and its mean-value problem that Beale draws on p. 182. The discrete reformulation (5.5)–(5.6) is the deterministic-equivalent linear program used for finitely many scenarios.

Formalizing it. The theorems are proved in the paper, and their content is classical. The mission produces machine-checked statements of the model with its implicit hypotheses made explicit (attainment of the second stage, integrability of the cost), and proofs of the three results in Lean. The platform already has related statements in other models (finite scenario sets with extended-real recourse, and a complete-recourse, finite-second-moment version); none has Beale's hypotheses, and none states convexity of c′x+E Qc'x+E\,Qc′x+EQ for an arbitrary distribution.

Difficulty

The mathematics is short; the difficulty is in the encoding. The second-stage value is a minimum that may fail to exist: the second stage may be infeasible for some xxx and some outcomes, or unbounded below. A real-valued infimum then takes an arbitrary default value, and convexity would become a statement about that default. Similarly, the mean value only exists when the cost is integrable. A faithful statement has to carry attainment and integrability exactly where the paper tacitly assumes them, on the domain x≥0x\ge0x≥0 the paper uses, and no stronger condition (such as complete recourse or moment bounds) that the paper does not make. In the discrete reformulation, the minimum over the whole family (yr)r(y_r)_r(yr​)r​ has to be matched with the probability-weighted sum of per-scenario minima.

Formalization scope

  • Vectors are Fin n → ℝ, matrices Matrix (Fin m) (Fin n) ℝ, inner products dotProduct, and y≥0y\ge0y≥0 is the componentwise order. The random data are functions A : Ω → Matrix (Fin m) (Fin n) ℝ and β : Ω → Fin m → ℝ on a measurable space with a probability measure P; no measurability of the data is assumed beyond integrability of the cost.
  • The second-stage value is the real infimum of f′yf'yf′y over the feasible set. It equals 000 on an infeasible or unbounded-below second stage, so each theorem assumes attainment of the minimum where it is evaluated (the paper's "value of yyy that minimizes CCC"). The goal assumes attainment for almost every outcome at every x≥0x\ge0x≥0.
  • E(C)E(C)E(C) is the Bochner integral, which is 000 for a non-integrable integrand, so the goal assumes integrability of C(x,⋅)C(x,\cdot)C(x,⋅) at every x≥0x\ge0x≥0 (the paper's "mean value E(C)E(C)E(C)").
  • Convexity is claimed on {x:x≥0}\{x : x\ge0\}{x:x≥0}, the paper's domain, not on all of Rn\mathbb R^nRn. Theorem 3 is stated for fixed non-negative xxx (the model's first-stage domain) and on every convex set of data on which the minimum is attained, since the paper names no domain.
  • A formalization in which the value is an unconstrained infimum without attainment, or the expectation is taken without integrability, is trivially convex on the region where the default values apply and does not state Beale's theorem; such variants are ruled out.
  • Reusable beyond this mission: basic facts on the optimal value of a parametric linear program in its right-hand side and cost data, and convexity of integrals of pointwise-convex integrands. Proofs of the milestones and of the goal, and alternative formulations in extended reals, are welcome.

Selected references

  • E. M. L. Beale, On Minimizing a Convex Function Subject to Linear Inequalities, Journal of the Royal Statistical Society, Series B 17(2):173–184, 1955. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.2517-6161.1955.tb00191.x
  • G. B. Dantzig, Linear Programming under Uncertainty, Management Science 1(3–4):197–206, 1955. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.1.3-4.197
  • F. L. Hitchcock, The Distribution of a Product from Several Sources to Numerous Localities, Journal of Mathematics and Physics 20:224–230, 1941. https://doi.org/10.1002/sapm1941201224
  • D. W. Walkup and R. J.-B. Wets, Stochastic Programs with Recourse, SIAM Journal on Applied Mathematics 15(5):1299–1314, 1967. https://doi.org/10.1137/0115113
  • R. J.-B. Wets, Stochastic Programs with Fixed Recourse: The Equivalent Deterministic Program, SIAM Review 16(3):309–339, 1974. https://doi.org/10.1137/1016053
  • J. R. Birge and F. Louveaux, Introduction to Stochastic Programming, 2nd ed., Springer, 2011. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4614-0237-4
6 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

On Minimizing a Convex Function Subject to Linear Inequalities I: Beale's Simplex Method for a Convex Quadratic Function TerminatesResearch Paper

Motivation

Quadratic programming, the minimization of a convex quadratic function subject to linear constraints, is the simplest nonlinear extension of linear programming. It arises in least-squares estimation with sign constraints, in portfolio selection, and as the subproblem solved at each iteration of Newton-type methods for general smooth convex programs. E. M. L. Beale's 1955 paper (DOI 10.1111/j.2517-6161.1955.tb00191.x) gave one of the first finite algorithms for it by extending Dantzig's simplex method: the method keeps the simplex tableau and adds free variables, linear functions of the original variables with no sign restriction, along which the quadratic stops decreasing.

Timeline:

  • 1951: Dantzig publishes the simplex method for linear programming.
  • 1952: Charnes introduces ε-perturbations to resolve degeneracy in the simplex method.
  • 1955: Beale extends the simplex method to convex quadratic objectives and proves that the iteration terminates (§3 of the paper; the result formalized here).
  • 1959: Beale's "On quadratic programming" (Naval Research Logistics Quarterly 6) develops the method further; Wolfe's simplex method for quadratic programming (Econometrica 27) appears the same year.

Setting

There are nnn restricted variables xj≥0x_j \ge 0xj​≥0 satisfying mmm linearly independent linear equations, and a convex quadratic objective CCC. The iteration keeps N=n−mN = n - mN=n−m nonbasic variables z1,…,zNz_1, \dots, z_Nz1​,…,zN​, each either a restricted variable or a free variable, and writes every restricted variable as an affine function of them:

xh=ah0+∑l=1Nahlzl.(2.3)x_h = a_{h0} + \sum_{l=1}^{N} a_{hl} z_l. \qquad (2.3)xh​=ah0​+l=1∑N​ahl​zl​.(2.3)

A restricted variable that is not nonbasic is basic. The associated solution sets every zl=0z_l = 0zl​=0, so xh=ah0x_h = a_{h0}xh​=ah0​. The objective is written as

C=∑k=0N∑l=0Ncklzkzl,z0=1,(3.1)C = \sum_{k=0}^{N} \sum_{l=0}^{N} c_{kl} z_k z_l, \qquad z_0 = 1, \qquad (3.1)C=k=0∑N​l=0∑N​ckl​zk​zl​,z0​=1,(3.1)

with (ckl)(c_{kl})(ckl​) symmetric. Thus c00c_{00}c00​ is the value of CCC at the associated solution and 2ck02c_{k0}2ck0​ is its linear coefficient in zkz_kzk​. The number of nonbasic free variables is sss.

One step chooses a nonbasic zpz_pzp​ that can profitably be altered: a free one with cp0≠0c_{p0} \ne 0cp0​=0 if there is one, otherwise a restricted one with cp0<0c_{p0} < 0cp0​<0. It orients zpz_pzp​ so that it is to be increased, and increases it from 000. It stops at the first of two events. Either a basic variable xqx_qxq​ reaches 000 (the ratio test (2.4)), and then xqx_qxq​ becomes nonbasic in place of zpz_pzp​. Or CCC stops decreasing where the free variable ur=cp0+∑lcplzlu_r = c_{p0} + \sum_l c_{pl} z_lur​=cp0​+∑l​cpl​zl​ vanishes (3.2), and then uru_rur​ becomes nonbasic in place of zpz_pzp​. The coefficients are then transformed by substituting for zpz_pzp​ (eqs. (3.4)–(3.6)). CCC is in standard form when it has no linear term in any free variable.

Formalization targets

Goal: the iteration terminates

From a tableau with symmetric (ckl)(c_{kl})(ckl​), positive semidefinite quadratic block (ckl)k,l≥1(c_{kl})_{k,l \ge 1}(ckl​)k,l≥1​ and consistent labels, there is no infinite run

T0→T1→T2→⋯T_0 \to T_1 \to T_2 \to \cdotsT0​→T1​→T2​→⋯

of steps along which every basic variable stays strictly positive in the associated solution. No bound on the number of steps is claimed, as in the paper.

Milestones

  1. Eq. (3.7): the closed form of the transformed matrix, its symmetry, and the invariance ∑cklzkzl=∑ckl′′zk′zl′\sum c_{kl} z_k z_l = \sum c''_{kl} z'_k z'_l∑ckl​zk​zl​=∑ckl′′​zk′​zl′​.
  2. Lemma 1: when a free variable enters, its row and column vanish off the diagonal, the index 000 included.
  3. Lemma 2: a slot whose row and column vanish off the diagonal keeps this property when another free variable enters.
  4. The optimality criterion (p. 175): if no nonbasic variable can profitably be altered and CCC is convex, then c00c_{00}c00​ is the minimum over the feasible region.
  5. In standard form, c00≤C(z)c_{00} \le C(z)c00​≤C(z) for every zzz with the restricted nonbasic variables at 000.
  6. CCC decreases at every step: c00′<c00c'_{00} < c_{00}c00′​<c00​.
  7. A finite run never returns to a standard form with the same set of restricted nonbasic variables.
  8. If CCC is not in standard form and s=s0s = s_0s=s0​, then within s0s_0s0​ steps either standard form is reached or sss drops, and sss never exceeds s0s_0s0​ on the way.

Significance

The theorem makes Beale's method an algorithm: a finite procedure that ends either at an optimal tableau (milestone 4) or with a ray along which CCC decreases without bound. This finiteness is what later active-set methods for quadratic programming inherit.

The result was proved in 1955. What remains is to formalize it: a machine-checked account of a simplex-type method whose state includes variables that are created during the run and later discarded. Mathlib has no simplex-type algorithm for quadratic programming, and no machine-checked proof of this theorem is known. The pivot algebra (3.4)–(3.7) and the tableau model are reusable for other pivoting methods for quadratic programs.

Difficulty

The argument for linear programming does not carry over. There, the objective strictly decreases and a basis is a subset of a finite set of columns, so no basis repeats. Here each step may create a new free variable, and nothing bounds the number of distinct free variables that can occur. Tableaux are therefore not drawn from a finite set, and a strictly decreasing objective alone does not give termination. The paper states this itself: "there is no obvious limit to the number of free variables that may be involved". The difficulty is to bound the number of steps between returns to a well-behaved tableau, and this depends both on the rule that free variables are chosen first and on how the coefficient matrix evolves under repeated pivots.

Formalization scope

  • Representation. The nonbasic variables occupy fixed slots Fin (N+1). Slot 0 is z0=1z_0 = 1z0​=1; the nonbasic slot k : Fin N is index k.succ. A pivot stores the new nonbasic variable in the slot of the variable it replaces, so the paper's index qqq in (3.4)–(3.7) is that slot. The tableau holds the labels (restricted xjx_jxj​ or free), the rows of all nnn restricted variables (a nonbasic one has the unit row), and (ckl)(c_{kl})(ckl​). Free variables carry no row, as in the paper.
  • The pivot. pivotC is computed literally from (3.5) and then (3.6). Rows are transformed by the same substitution, as the paper states.
  • The step. The step is a relation. It allows any profitable choice of zpz_pzp​ subject to the free-first rule, and at a tie either outcome. No pricing rule is fixed, since the paper fixes none.
  • Convexity. Convexity of CCC is the symmetry of (ckl)(c_{kl})(ckl​) plus positive semidefiniteness of the block (ckl)k,l≥1(c_{kl})_{k,l \ge 1}(ckl​)k,l≥1​, assumed on the initial tableau.
  • Added hypothesis. The one hypothesis not on the page is that every basic restricted variable is strictly positive in the associated solution of every tableau of the run. It replaces Charnes's ε-perturbations, by which the paper ensures "the ah0a_{h0}ah0​ are always positive, and not zero". Positivity is required of basic variables only; nonbasic variables are 000 in the associated solution.
  • Out of scope. The link to the original equations (2.1) and phase 1 (artificial variables, the M-method) are not formalized: the iteration starts from a tableau already in the form (2.3).
  • Ruling out a trivial goal. A step relation that never fires, or a positivity hypothesis that no tableau can meet after a step, would make the goal trivially true. A sorry-free check exhibits a convex instance with consistent labels, a step, and positive basic variables before and after it.

Contributions are welcome on every milestone. The algebraic milestones 1–3 are self-contained.

Selected references

  • E. M. L. Beale, On Minimizing a Convex Function Subject to Linear Inequalities, Journal of the Royal Statistical Society, Series B 17(2):173–184, 1955. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.2517-6161.1955.tb00191.x
  • A. Charnes, Optimality and Degeneracy in Linear Programming, Econometrica 20(2):160–170, 1952. https://doi.org/10.2307/1907845
  • G. B. Dantzig, Maximization of a Linear Function of Variables Subject to Linear Inequalities, in T. C. Koopmans (ed.), Activity Analysis of Production and Allocation, Wiley, 1951, pp. 339–347.
  • E. M. L. Beale, On Quadratic Programming, Naval Research Logistics Quarterly 6(3):227–243, 1959. https://doi.org/10.1002/nav.3800060305
  • P. Wolfe, The Simplex Method for Quadratic Programming, Econometrica 27(3):382–398, 1959. https://doi.org/10.2307/1909468
12 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Algorithmic Game TheoryOptimizationProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Optimal Pricing of Seasonal Products in the Presence of Forward-Looking Consumers 2: A Threshold Nash Equilibrium under Announced Fixed-Discount PricingResearch Paper

Motivation

Retailers of fashion and seasonal goods sell at a premium price early in the season and mark down later. When customers anticipate the markdown, some of them wait, and the seller's pricing problem becomes a game between the seller and a population of forward-looking (strategic) customers. Aviv and Pazgal (MSOM 10(3), 2008) study this game in a model with limited inventory, stochastic arrivals and valuations that decline over the season, under two classes of seller policies: contingent pricing, where the discount depends on the inventory left, and announced fixed-discount pricing, where the seller commits to both prices upfront. Their numerical study (§7.3) compares the two classes and finds that precommitment can raise expected revenue by up to about 8%.

That comparison needs, for every announced price path, the customers' equilibrium response. Theorem 2 of the paper (p. 348) supplies it: a threshold purchasing policy, pinned down by a scalar fixed-point equation for the probability that a waiting customer is served. This mission formalizes Theorem 2. A companion mission of the same series formalizes Theorem 1, the contingent-pricing counterpart.

Setting

A seller has Q≥1Q \ge 1Q≥1 units to sell over a season [0,H][0, H][0,H], split at a fixed time TTT with 0<T≤H0 < T \le H0<T≤H. Customers arrive by a Poisson process with rate λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0. Customer jjj has a base valuation VjV_jVj​ drawn from a continuous distribution FFF (tail Fˉ=1−F\bar F = 1 - FFˉ=1−F), and at time ttt values the product at Vj(t)=Vje−αtV_j(t) = V_j e^{-\alpha t}Vj​(t)=Vj​e−αt, where the decline factor α≥0\alpha \ge 0α≥0 is common to all customers.

Under an announced price path the seller commits to a premium price p1p_1p1​ on [0,T)[0, T)[0,T) and a discount price p2≤p1p_2 \le p_1p2​≤p1​ from TTT on; p2p_2p2​ does not depend on the remaining inventory. Customers know the initial inventory but not the current one.

A customer arriving at t<Tt < Tt<T buys immediately if and only if (i) the current surplus V(t)−p1V(t) - p_1V(t)−p1​ is nonnegative and (ii) it is at least the expected surplus of waiting,

ω⋅max⁡{V(T)−p2,0},\omega\cdot\max\{V(T) - p_2, 0\},ω⋅max{V(T)−p2​,0},

where ω\omegaω is the probability that a unit will be allocated to the customer at time TTT. Units left at TTT are rationed at random among the customers who request one.

For a threshold function ψ\psiψ on [0,T)[0, T)[0,T) the paper defines three segment rates: ΛI(ψ)\Lambda_I(\psi)ΛI​(ψ), the expected number of customers who buy at p1p_1p1​; ΛS(ψ,p1,p2)\Lambda_S(\psi, p_1, p_2)ΛS​(ψ,p1​,p2​), those who could buy at p1p_1p1​ but wait and want to buy at p2p_2p2​; and ΛW(p1,p2)\Lambda_W(p_1, p_2)ΛW​(p1​,p2​), those whose valuation was below p1p_1p1​ and who want to buy at p2p_2p2​. Each is λ\lambdaλ times an integral over [0,T][0, T][0,T] of Fˉ\bar FFˉ at scaled prices (p. 345). With P(x∣Λ)P(x \mid \Lambda)P(x∣Λ) the Poisson probabilities, the allocation probability of qqq units is

A(q∣Λ)=∑y=0∞qmax⁡{1+y,q} P(y∣Λ).A(q \mid \Lambda) = \sum_{y=0}^{\infty} \frac{q}{\max\{1+y, q\}}\,P(y \mid \Lambda).A(q∣Λ)=y=0∑∞​max{1+y,q}q​P(y∣Λ).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2 (p. 348)

For w∈[0,1]w \in [0,1]w∈[0,1] let

ψA(t)=max⁡{p1,p1−wp21−we−α(T−t)},0≤t<T,(7)\psi_A(t) = \max\left\{p_1, \frac{p_1 - wp_2}{1 - we^{-\alpha(T-t)}}\right\},\qquad 0 \le t < T, \tag{7}ψA​(t)=max{p1​,1−we−α(T−t)p1​−wp2​​},0≤t<T,(7)

and suppose www solves

w=∑x=0Q−1P(x∣ΛI(ψA))⋅A(Q−x∣ΛS(ψA,p1,p2)+ΛW(p1,p2)).(8)w = \sum_{x=0}^{Q-1} P\big(x \mid \Lambda_I(\psi_A)\big)\cdot A\big(Q-x \mid \Lambda_S(\psi_A, p_1, p_2) + \Lambda_W(p_1, p_2)\big). \tag{8}w=x=0∑Q−1​P(x∣ΛI​(ψA​))⋅A(Q−x∣ΛS​(ψA​,p1​,p2​)+ΛW​(p1​,p2​)).(8)

Then, when all other customers use ψA\psi_AψA​ (so that a waiting customer is served with the probability on the right of (8)), every customer arriving at t∈[0,T)t \in [0, T)t∈[0,T) buys immediately if and only if V(t)≥ψA(t)V(t) \ge \psi_A(t)V(t)≥ψA​(t): the symmetric threshold profile is a Nash equilibrium.

Milestones: the two cases of the proof (p. 358)

  1. If e−α(T−t)≤p2/p1e^{-\alpha(T-t)} \le p_2/p_1e−α(T−t)≤p2​/p1​, the threshold is p1p_1p1​.
  2. If e−α(T−t)>p2/p1e^{-\alpha(T-t)} > p_2/p_1e−α(T−t)>p2​/p1​, the threshold is (p1−wp2)/(1−we−α(T−t))≥p1(p_1 - wp_2)/(1 - we^{-\alpha(T-t)}) \ge p_1(p1​−wp2​)/(1−we−α(T−t))≥p1​.

Significance

Theorem 2 reduces the customers' equilibrium under an announced path to a single scalar www. Everything downstream in §5 and §7 rests on it: the seller's expected revenue πA/S(p1,p2)\pi_{A/S}(p_1, p_2)πA/S​(p1​,p2​) (p. 348) is written in terms of ψA\psi_AψA​, the seller's optimal announced path maximizes it, and the comparison between announced and contingent pricing uses the resulting value πA/S∗\pi^*_{A/S}πA/S∗​. The theorem also explains the qualitative prediction of the model: the threshold exceeds p1p_1p1​ exactly when the announced discount is deep relative to the decline of valuations, and it rises with the perceived availability www.

The result is proved in the paper; to the best of our search it has no machine-checked proof. A formal development contributes the model objects (segment rates for threshold policies, the allocation probability for random rationing among Poisson requesters) in a form reusable by the rest of the series and by other strategic-customer pricing models, and a checked proof of the equilibrium property. The existence of a solution to (8) is not proved in the paper and is a natural further target.

Difficulty

The best-response part of the argument is elementary once the availability is known. The substance of the statement lies in the availability itself: the probability that a waiting customer is served is not a free parameter but the one generated, through (8), by the other customers' use of the same threshold. A formalization must connect the segment rates, the Poisson counts and random rationing into one expression and keep the fixed-point coupling between www and ψA\psi_AψA​ intact; dropping it turns the theorem into a one-line inequality about an arbitrary www. The division by 1−we−α(T−t)1 - we^{-\alpha(T-t)}1−we−α(T−t) also degenerates when w=1w = 1w=1 and α=0\alpha = 0α=0, and has to be excluded explicitly.

Formalization scope

The Lean development lives in namespace SeasonalPricing.Announced. Conventions:

  • Time is real; base valuations have law μ : Measure ℝ with IsProbabilityMeasure μ, FFF = ProbabilityTheory.cdf μ, and continuity of FFF (the paper's "continuous distribution") is a hypothesis of the goal. No support condition on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) is imposed; the statement quantifies over every real base valuation VVV.
  • ΛI,ΛS,ΛW\Lambda_I, \Lambda_S, \Lambda_WΛI​,ΛS​,ΛW​ are interval integrals over [0,T][0, T][0,T] exactly as printed. P(x∣Λ)=e−ΛΛx/x!P(x \mid \Lambda) = e^{-\Lambda}\Lambda^x/x!P(x∣Λ)=e−ΛΛx/x! is written out; A(q∣Λ)A(q\mid\Lambda)A(q∣Λ) is the infinite series (tsum) as printed, not its closed form.
  • availability is the right-hand side of (8), with ψA\psi_AψA​ built from www by (7).

Readings of the paper's informal words:

  • "Nash equilibrium" is read as the best-response property the paper's proof checks: against the availability generated by (8), the immediate-purchase rule of p. 344 coincides with the threshold ψA\psi_AψA​ at every t∈[0,T)t \in [0, T)t∈[0,T) and every valuation. The paper defines no strategy space beyond threshold rules.
  • "www is a solution to (8)": the theorem is conditional on a solution; its existence is neither assumed elsewhere nor claimed. The conditional statement has content only when (8) has a solution, which the paper does not prove.
  • www as a likelihood: 0≤w≤10 \le w \le 10≤w≤1 is a hypothesis (it also follows from (8)).
  • Added hypothesis: α>0\alpha > 0α>0 or w<1w < 1w<1, which keeps 1−we−α(T−t)>01 - we^{-\alpha(T-t)} > 01−we−α(T−t)>0 for t<Tt < Tt<T; the paper's formula is undefined when it fails. In the milestones the same condition appears as we−α(T−t)<1we^{-\alpha(T-t)} < 1we−α(T−t)<1, and 0<p10 < p_10<p1​ is added so that p2/p1p_2/p_1p2​/p1​ is meaningful.
  • The rule on [T,H][T, H][T,H] (buy at TTT iff V(T)>p2V(T) > p_2V(T)>p2​) is part of the model and is not restated; HHH does not enter the statements.

A formalization in which www is an arbitrary number in [0,1][0,1][0,1], not tied to (8), is ruled out: it is the best-response lemma alone, not Theorem 2. Contributions welcome: proofs of the two milestones and the goal; lemmas such as 0≤A(q∣Λ)≤10 \le A(q\mid\Lambda) \le 10≤A(q∣Λ)≤1 and summability of its series; the closed form of A(q∣Λ)A(q \mid \Lambda)A(q∣Λ) printed on p. 346; and an existence result for (8).

Selected references

  • Y. Aviv and A. Pazgal, Optimal Pricing of Seasonal Products in the Presence of Forward-Looking Consumers, Manufacturing & Service Operations Management 10(3):339–359, 2008. https://doi.org/10.1287/msom.1070.0183
  • G. Gallego and G. van Ryzin, Optimal Dynamic Pricing of Inventories with Stochastic Demand over Finite Horizons, Management Science 40(8):999–1020, 1994. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.40.8.999
  • X. Su, Intertemporal Pricing with Strategic Customer Behavior, Management Science 53(5):726–741, 2007. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.1060.0667
5 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
AnalysisNumerical AnalysisOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Analysis of Generalized Pattern Searches: Nonnegative Clarke Derivatives at Limits of Refining SubsequencesResearch Paper

Motivation

Generalized pattern search (GPS) is a class of derivative-free methods for minimizing a function that can only be evaluated, not differentiated. Such objectives arise in engineering design, where one evaluation is an expensive simulation that may fail and return no value at all. The helicopter rotor design problem of Booker et al. is one example: no value was returned for roughly 66% of the trial points (Booker et al., 1999). A method for such problems has to tolerate objectives that are discontinuous or take the value +∞+\infty+∞.

Earlier convergence theory for GPS assumed continuous differentiability of the objective on a neighbourhood of the level set. Torczon established it for unconstrained problems (SIAM J. Optim. 7, 1997), and Lewis and Torczon extended it to bound constraints (1999) and to finitely many linear constraints (SIAM J. Optim. 10, 2000). Audet and Dennis (SIAM J. Optim. 13, 2003) replaced these analyses with a single argument. Its conclusions are local and are graded by the smoothness of the objective at the limit point only, through Clarke's generalized directional derivative. That paper is the source of this mission. Its analysis is the basis of the later mesh adaptive direct search (MADS) theory (Audet, Dennis, SIAM J. Optim. 17, 2006).

Setting

The problem is

min⁡x∈Ωf(x),f:Rn→R∪{+∞},Ω={x∈Rn:ℓ≤Ax≤u},\min_{x\in\Omega} f(x),\qquad f:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb R\cup\{+\infty\},\qquad \Omega=\{x\in\mathbb R^n:\ell\le Ax\le u\},x∈Ωmin​f(x),f:Rn→R∪{+∞},Ω={x∈Rn:ℓ≤Ax≤u},

with A∈Rm×nA\in\mathbb R^{m\times n}A∈Rm×n and ℓ≤u\ell\le uℓ≤u in (R∪{±∞})m(\mathbb R\cup\{\pm\infty\})^m(R∪{±∞})m. The algorithm works with the barrier function fΩf_\OmegafΩ​, equal to fff on Ω\OmegaΩ and to +∞+\infty+∞ elsewhere.

The algorithm uses a finite set of directions D=GZˉD=G\bar ZD=GZˉ, the columns dj=Gzˉjd_j=G\bar z_jdj​=Gzˉj​ of the product of a nonsingular G∈Rn×nG\in\mathbb R^{n\times n}G∈Rn×n and an integer matrix Zˉ∈Zn×p\bar Z\in\mathbb Z^{n\times p}Zˉ∈Zn×p. The directions form a positive spanning set: their nonnegative combinations give all of Rn\mathbb R^nRn. At iteration kkk, with iterate xkx_kxk​ and mesh size parameter Δk>0\Delta_k>0Δk​>0, the mesh is Mk={xk+ΔkDz:z∈Z+p}M_k=\{x_k+\Delta_k Dz: z\in\mathbb Z_+^{p}\}Mk​={xk​+Δk​Dz:z∈Z+p​}. A poll set {xk+Δkd:d∈Dk}\{x_k+\Delta_k d: d\in D_k\}{xk​+Δk​d:d∈Dk​} is drawn from a positive spanning subset Dk⊆DD_k\subseteq DDk​⊆D. Each iteration ends in one of two ways:

  1. Improved mesh point. Some xk+1∈Mk∩Ωx_{k+1}\in M_k\cap\Omegaxk+1​∈Mk​∩Ω with fΩ(xk+1)<fΩ(xk)f_\Omega(x_{k+1})<f_\Omega(x_k)fΩ​(xk+1​)<fΩ​(xk​) was found, by the free SEARCH step or by the poll. Then Δk+1=τwkΔk\Delta_{k+1}=\tau^{w_k}\Delta_kΔk+1​=τwk​Δk​ with 0≤wk≤w+0\le w_k\le w^+0≤wk​≤w+.
  2. Mesh local optimizer. fΩ(xk)≤fΩ(xk+Δkd)f_\Omega(x_k)\le f_\Omega(x_k+\Delta_k d)fΩ​(xk​)≤fΩ​(xk​+Δk​d) for every d∈Dkd\in D_kd∈Dk​. Then xk+1=xkx_{k+1}=x_kxk+1​=xk​ and Δk+1=τwkΔk\Delta_{k+1}=\tau^{w_k}\Delta_kΔk+1​=τwk​Δk​ with w−≤wk≤−1w^-\le w_k\le-1w−≤wk​≤−1.

Here τ>1\tau>1τ>1 is rational and w−≤−1≤0≤w+w^-\le-1\le 0\le w^+w−≤−1≤0≤w+ are integers. The assumptions are A1 fΩ(x0)<∞f_\Omega(x_0)<\inftyfΩ​(x0​)<∞, A2 AAA is rational, and A3 all iterates lie in a compact set. A refining subsequence is an infinite set of mesh local optimizers {xk}k∈K\{x_k\}_{k\in K}{xk​}k∈K​ along which Δk→0\Delta_k\to 0Δk​→0 (Definition 3.5). For fff Lipschitz near x^\hat xx^, Clarke's derivative is

f∘(x^;d)=lim sup⁡y→x^, t↓0f(y+td)−f(y)t.f^\circ(\hat x;d)=\limsup_{y\to\hat x,\ t\downarrow 0}\frac{f(y+td)-f(y)}{t}.f∘(x^;d)=y→x^, t↓0limsup​tf(y+td)−f(y)​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.7

Assume A1–A3. Let x^\hat xx^ be the limit of a refining subsequence, and let d∈Dd\in Dd∈D be a direction polled at a feasible point xk+Δkdx_k+\Delta_k dxk​+Δk​d for infinitely many kkk in the subsequence. If fff is Lipschitz near x^\hat xx^, then

f∘(x^;d) ≥ 0.f^\circ(\hat x;d)\ \ge\ 0 .f∘(x^;d) ≥ 0.

Milestones on the way

  • Theorem 3.1: the iterates have a limit point, lim⁡kf(xk)\lim_k f(x_k)limk​f(xk​) exists and dominates fff at lower semicontinuity limit points, and all continuity limit points share one value.
  • Lemma 3.2: min⁡u≠v∈Mk∥u−v∥≥Δk/∥G−1∥\min_{u\ne v\in M_k}\|u-v\|\ge\Delta_k/\|G^{-1}\|minu=v∈Mk​​∥u−v∥≥Δk​/∥G−1∥ for every norm giving nonzero integer vectors norm at least 111.
  • Lemma 3.3: Δk≤Δ0τr+\Delta_k\le\Delta_0\tau^{r^+}Δk​≤Δ0​τr+ for some positive integer r+r^+r+.
  • Proposition 3.4: lim inf⁡k→∞Δk=0\liminf_{k\to\infty}\Delta_k=0liminfk→∞​Δk​=0.
  • Theorem 3.6: a convergent refining subsequence exists.

Corollaries

  • Theorem 3.9: if Ω=Rn\Omega=\mathbb R^nΩ=Rn and fff is strictly differentiable at x^\hat xx^, then ∇f(x^)=0\nabla f(\hat x)=0∇f(x^)=0.
  • Theorem 3.14: if the poll sets conform to the boundary of Ω\OmegaΩ (Definition 3.13) and fff is strictly differentiable at x^\hat xx^, then ∇f(x^)Tw≥0\nabla f(\hat x)^Tw\ge 0∇f(x^)Tw≥0 on the tangent cone TΩ(x^)T_\Omega(\hat x)TΩ​(x^) and −∇f(x^)∈NΩ(x^)-\nabla f(\hat x)\in N_\Omega(\hat x)−∇f(x^)∈NΩ​(x^). So x^\hat xx^ is a KKT point.

Significance

Theorem 3.7 gives a first-order conclusion at a limit point from a local hypothesis at that point alone. It does not require smoothness elsewhere, finiteness of fff elsewhere, or continuity. It turns the heuristic "the method stopped improving on ever finer meshes" into a statement about generalized derivatives. The unconstrained stationarity result (Theorem 3.9) and the linearly constrained KKT result (Theorem 3.14) follow from it, and they recover the Torczon and Lewis–Torczon theorems under weaker smoothness assumptions. The chain Lemma 3.2 → Lemma 3.3 → Proposition 3.4 → Theorem 3.6 shows that the goal's hypothesis is always met. Every run satisfying A1 and A3 has a refining subsequence, which rests on the rationality of τ\tauτ and on the integer structure of DDD.

All results in this mission are proved in the source paper. None of them has, to the best of our knowledge, a machine-checked proof. The mission contributes a formal model of the GPS algorithm class as a class of runs, a formal Clarke directional derivative, and checked proofs of the mesh-refinement chain and the main theorem.

Difficulty

Given a refining subsequence, the goal is a comparison of limsups: the poll inequalities give nonnegative difference quotients at the points (xk,Δk)(x_k,\Delta_k)(xk​,Δk​), which converge to (x^,0+)(\hat x,0^+)(x^,0+). The difficulty lies in two places. First, the objective is extended-valued, and the barrier hides fff at infeasible poll points, where the poll inequality fΩ(xk)≤+∞f_\Omega(x_k)\le+\inftyfΩ​(xk​)≤+∞ says nothing. The hypothesis on ddd has to supply feasibility, and the Lipschitz hypothesis has to supply finiteness near x^\hat xx^. Second, the existence of refining subsequences is not a compactness argument alone. Coarsening is allowed, so Δk\Delta_kΔk​ need not decrease, and with an irrational τ\tauτ or a direction set that is not an integer lattice image (for instance D=[−1,+π]D=[-1,+\pi]D=[−1,+π] in R\mathbb RR) the meshes can be dense and lim inf⁡Δk\liminf\Delta_kliminfΔk​ can be positive. The lattice argument behind Proposition 3.4 is where the integrality hypotheses are used.

Formalization scope

Points of Rn\mathbb R^nRn are Fin n → ℝ, fff takes values in WithTop ℝ, and the bounds ℓ,u\ell,uℓ,u are EReal-valued, so m=0m=0m=0 gives Ω=Rn\Omega=\mathbb R^nΩ=Rn. The barrier is defined by cases, never by extended addition. Directions are the columns of G * Zbar indexed by Fin p, and DkD_kDk​ is a Finset (Fin p). A GPS run is a structure of sequences xk,Δk,Dk,wkx_k,\Delta_k,D_k,w_kxk​,Δk​,Dk​,wk​ and a per-iteration predicate "mesh local optimizer", subject to exactly the two update rules above, Δ0>0\Delta_0>0Δ0​>0, rational τ>1\tau>1τ>1 and the exponent bounds. The SEARCH step, the choice of DkD_kDk​ and the exponents are left free, since the paper allows any strategy. A subsequence is a strictly increasing map K:N→NK:\mathbb N\to\mathbb NK:N→N. The Clarke derivative of a real function is an EReal-valued limit superior along y→x^y\to\hat xy→x^, t→0+t\to 0^+t→0+. "fff Lipschitz near x^\hat xx^" means that fff agrees near x^\hat xx^ with a real function Lipschitz there, and the conclusions are stated for every such function. Strict differentiability is the directional notion of Section 3.4 of the paper.

The goal is not trivialized by an empty run class: Theorem 3.6, on the same class, asserts that refining subsequences exist. The mesh-local-optimizer branch requires the complete poll inequality over DkD_kDk​. The Clarke limit superior cannot take a default value. The direction ddd must be polled at feasible points infinitely often, which is the paper's "fff was evaluated".

Contributions welcome: proofs of any milestone, and reusable lemmas on positive spanning sets, lattice points in compact sets, and the Clarke derivative (for instance, that it equals ∇f(x^)Td\nabla f(\hat x)^Td∇f(x^)Td under strict differentiability).

Selected references

  • C. Audet, J. E. Dennis Jr., Analysis of Generalized Pattern Searches, SIAM J. Optim. 13(3):889–903, 2003. https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623400378742
  • V. Torczon, On the Convergence of Pattern Search Algorithms, SIAM J. Optim. 7(1):1–25, 1997. https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623493250780
  • R. M. Lewis, V. Torczon, Pattern Search Methods for Linearly Constrained Minimization, SIAM J. Optim. 10(3):917–941, 2000. https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623497331373
  • F. H. Clarke, Optimization and Nonsmooth Analysis, Wiley, 1983; reprinted SIAM Classics in Applied Mathematics 5, 1990. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611971309
  • A. J. Booker, J. E. Dennis Jr., P. D. Frank, D. B. Serafini, V. Torczon, M. W. Trosset, A rigorous framework for optimization of expensive functions by surrogates, Structural Optimization 17:1–13, 1999. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01197559
  • C. Audet, J. E. Dennis Jr., Mesh Adaptive Direct Search Algorithms for Constrained Optimization, SIAM J. Optim. 17(1):188–217, 2006. https://doi.org/10.1137/040603371
13 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
CombinatoricsOptimizationProbability+1·Captain: mikedeng1

Maximizing Non-Monotone Submodular Functions II: A Nonadaptive Algorithm Achieves 1/3 of the OptimumResearch Paper

Motivation

Maximizing a submodular set function without constraints contains Max Cut, Max Directed Cut, maximum facility location and several graph and hypergraph cut problems as special cases, and it appears in operations research wherever a value exhibits diminishing returns but is not monotone (profit that combines coverage with a cost, for example). These problems are NP-hard, so the question is which fraction of the optimum an efficient algorithm can guarantee when the function is accessible only through a value oracle that returns f(S)f(S)f(S) for a queried set SSS.

Feige, Mirrokni and Vondrák (SIAM J. Comput. 40(4), 2011) gave the first constant-factor approximation algorithms for maximizing a general nonnegative submodular function. The simplest of them returns a uniformly random set and achieves 1/41/41/4 of the optimum; this mission is about the next one, a nonadaptive algorithm: it decides all of its oracle queries before seeing any answer, then computes a set from the answers. Such an algorithm can be run in one round of parallel queries. The paper shows that this restricted access already beats 1/41/41/4 and reaches 1/31/31/3.

Timeline. For Max Directed Cut, a random cut achieves 1/41/41/4. Feige, Mirrokni and Vondrák (FOCS 2007; journal version 2011) proved 1/41/41/4 for a random set and 1/31/31/3 nonadaptively for general nonnegative submodular functions, 1/31/31/3 and 2/52/52/5 by adaptive local search, and that 1/21/21/2 requires exponentially many queries. Buchbinder, Feldman, Naor and Schwartz (FOCS 2012, SIAM J. Comput. 2015) later reached the optimal 1/21/21/2 with a randomized double-greedy algorithm.

Setting

Let XXX be a finite ground set with n=∣X∣≥1n = |X| \ge 1n=∣X∣≥1 elements. A function f:2X→Rf : 2^X \to \mathbb{R}f:2X→R is submodular (Definition 1.1) if

f(S∪T)+f(S∩T)≤f(S)+f(T)for all S,T⊆X.f(S \cup T) + f(S \cap T) \le f(S) + f(T) \qquad \text{for all } S, T \subseteq X .f(S∪T)+f(S∩T)≤f(S)+f(T)for all S,T⊆X.

Throughout, fff is nonnegative, the paper's standing assumption, and OPT=max⁡S⊆Xf(S)OPT = \max_{S \subseteq X} f(S)OPT=maxS⊆X​f(S).

For p∈[0,1]p \in [0,1]p∈[0,1], X(p)X(p)X(p) denotes the random subset of XXX containing each element independently with probability ppp; R=X(1/2)R = X(1/2)R=X(1/2) is a uniformly random subset. For a set A⊆XA \subseteq XA⊆X, A(p)A(p)A(p) is the analogous random subset of AAA. The averaged marginal value of an element (Definition 2.4) is

ω(x)=E[f(R∪{x})−f(R∖{x})],R=X(1/2).\omega(x) = \mathbf{E}\big[f(R \cup \{x\}) - f(R \setminus \{x\})\big], \qquad R = X(1/2).ω(x)=E[f(R∪{x})−f(R∖{x})],R=X(1/2).

Algorithm NA (p. 1139):

  1. by random sampling, compute estimates ω~(x)\tilde\omega(x)ω~(x) with ∣ω~(x)−ω(x)∣<OPT/n2|\tilde\omega(x) - \omega(x)| < OPT/n^2∣ω~(x)−ω(x)∣<OPT/n2 for all xxx, with high probability;
  2. independently, sample R=X(1/2)R = X(1/2)R=X(1/2);
  3. with probability 8/98/98/9 return RRR;
  4. with probability 1/91/91/9 return A={x∈X:ω~(x)>0}A = \{x \in X : \tilde\omega(x) > 0\}A={x∈X:ω~(x)>0}.

Given the estimates, the expected value NA returns is 89 E[f(X(1/2))]+19f(A)\tfrac89\,\mathbf{E}[f(X(1/2))] + \tfrac19 f(A)98​E[f(X(1/2))]+91​f(A).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2.6 in the explicit form of its proof

For every nonnegative submodular fff and every estimate ω~\tilde\omegaω~ with ∣ω~(x)−ω(x)∣<OPT/n2|\tilde\omega(x) - \omega(x)| < OPT/n^2∣ω~(x)−ω(x)∣<OPT/n2 for all xxx,

89 E[f(X(1/2))]+19 f({x:ω~(x)>0}) ≥ (13−49n) OPT.\frac89\,\mathbf{E}[f(X(1/2))] + \frac19\, f\big(\{x : \tilde\omega(x) > 0\}\big) \ \ge\ \Big(\frac13 - \frac{4}{9n}\Big)\, OPT .98​E[f(X(1/2))]+91​f({x:ω~(x)>0}) ≥ (31​−9n4​)OPT.

The printed theorem says "at least (1/3−o(1)) OPT(1/3 - o(1))\,OPT(1/3−o(1))OPT"; the term 4/(9n)4/(9n)4/(9n) is what the proof establishes (p. 1140, last display).

Milestones

  1. Lemma 2.2: E[g(A(p))]≥(1−p) g(∅)+p g(A)\mathbf{E}[g(A(p))] \ge (1-p)\,g(\emptyset) + p\,g(A)E[g(A(p))]≥(1−p)g(∅)+pg(A) for submodular ggg.
  2. Lemma 2.3: E[f(A(p)∪B(q))]≥(1−p)(1−q)f(∅)+p(1−q)f(A)+(1−p)qf(B)+pqf(A∪B)\mathbf{E}[f(A(p) \cup B(q))] \ge (1-p)(1-q) f(\emptyset) + p(1-q) f(A) + (1-p)q f(B) + pq f(A \cup B)E[f(A(p)∪B(q))]≥(1−p)(1−q)f(∅)+p(1−q)f(A)+(1−p)qf(B)+pqf(A∪B) for independently sampled, possibly overlapping A,BA, BA,B.
  3. For B=X∖AB = X \setminus AB=X∖A and any CCC: f(A)+f(B∩C)+f(B∪C)≥f(C)f(A) + f(B \cap C) + f(B \cup C) \ge f(C)f(A)+f(B∩C)+f(B∪C)≥f(C).
  4. If ω≤OPT/n2\omega \le OPT/n^2ω≤OPT/n2 on BBB: E[f(R∪(B∩C))]≤E[f(R)]+OPT/(2n)\mathbf{E}[f(R \cup (B \cap C))] \le \mathbf{E}[f(R)] + OPT/(2n)E[f(R∪(B∩C))]≤E[f(R)]+OPT/(2n).
  5. E[f(R∪(B∩C))]≥14f(B∩C)+14f(C)\mathbf{E}[f(R \cup (B \cap C))] \ge \tfrac14 f(B \cap C) + \tfrac14 f(C)E[f(R∪(B∩C))]≥41​f(B∩C)+41​f(C).
  6. If ω≥−OPT/n2\omega \ge -OPT/n^2ω≥−OPT/n2 on AAA and B=X∖AB = X \setminus AB=X∖A: E[f(R)]≥E[f(R∩(B∪C))]−OPT/(2n)\mathbf{E}[f(R)] \ge \mathbf{E}[f(R \cap (B \cup C))] - OPT/(2n)E[f(R)]≥E[f(R∩(B∪C))]−OPT/(2n).
  7. E[f(R∩(B∪C))]≥14f(C)+14f(B∪C)\mathbf{E}[f(R \cap (B \cup C))] \ge \tfrac14 f(C) + \tfrac14 f(B \cup C)E[f(R∩(B∪C))]≥41​f(C)+41​f(B∪C).

Milestones 3–7 are the displayed steps of the proof of Theorem 2.6, stated for arbitrary sets where the page's argument does not use the optimality of CCC.

Significance

The theorem shows that nonadaptive access, a fixed batch of polynomially many value queries followed by a computation, suffices for a 1/31/31/3-approximation of unconstrained nonnegative submodular maximization, strictly better than the 1/41/41/4 of any algorithm that must return one of its queried sets (the paper shows 1/41/41/4 is optimal in that class, §4.2). The quantity ω\omegaω generalizes the in-degree/out-degree test for Max Directed Cut to arbitrary submodular functions, and Lemmas 2.2 and 2.3 are general sampling inequalities for submodular functions that the paper reuses for its adaptive smooth local search.

Formalizing it produces machine-checked versions of Lemmas 2.2 and 2.3 as statements about exact finite averages, a reusable expectation operator on product-distributed random subsets, and a checked version of the 1/31/31/3 argument with its explicit error term. The result is proved in the paper; to our knowledge none of it has been formalized in a proof assistant.

Difficulty

The two regimes the proof separates, "AAA is already good" and "one of f(B∩C)f(B \cap C)f(B∩C), f(B∪C)f(B \cup C)f(B∪C) is large", must be tied to the value of a uniformly random set, whereas the elements of AAA and BBB are chosen from estimated averages, not from the optimal set CCC. The natural attempt, comparing f(R)f(R)f(R) with f(C)f(C)f(C) element by element, fails because fff is not monotone: adding elements of CCC to RRR can decrease the value. The accuracy OPT/n2OPT/n^2OPT/n2 of the estimates must also be propagated through a sum over up to nnn elements, which is where the error term 4/(9n)4/(9n)4/(9n) comes from. The sampling lemmas require handling expectations over pairs of independent random subsets of possibly overlapping sets.

Formalization scope

  • The ground set is a Fintype X with DecidableEq, assumed Nonempty, so n=∣X∣≥1n = |X| \ge 1n=∣X∣≥1 and the divisions by nnn and n2n^2n2 are genuine; sets are Finset X; fff is real valued with nonnegativity ∀S, 0≤f(S)\forall S,\ 0 \le f(S)∀S, 0≤f(S) as an explicit hypothesis. Lemmas 2.2 and 2.3 are stated for real fff with no sign condition, as printed.
  • OPTOPTOPT is Finset.univ.sup' _ f, the true maximum over all subsets.
  • Every expectation over an independently sampled random set is the exact finite sum F(x)=∑Sf(S)∏i∈Sxi∏i∉S(1−xi)F(x) = \sum_{S} f(S)\prod_{i \in S} x_i \prod_{i \notin S}(1 - x_i)F(x)=∑S​f(S)∏i∈S​xi​∏i∈/S​(1−xi​); X(1/2)X(1/2)X(1/2) is x≡1/2x \equiv 1/2x≡1/2. Expectations over two independent samples (Lemma 2.3) are the corresponding iterated sums. Sampling probabilities carry the hypotheses 0≤p,q≤10 \le p, q \le 10≤p,q≤1.
  • The goal quantifies over every estimate ω~\tilde\omegaω~ satisfying the printed accuracy ∣ω~(x)−ω(x)∣<OPT/n2|\tilde\omega(x) - \omega(x)| < OPT/n^2∣ω~(x)−ω(x)∣<OPT/n2 (strict), with A={x:ω~(x)>0}A = \{x : \tilde\omega(x) > 0\}A={x:ω~(x)>0} (strict). The "with high probability" of NA's first step is this hypothesis; the sampling estimate that makes it likely (Lemma 2.5, a Chernoff-bound argument) is not part of the goal. When OPT=0OPT = 0OPT=0 the hypothesis is unsatisfiable, but then f≡0f \equiv 0f≡0 and nothing is lost.
  • The left-hand side is exactly the mixture 89 E[f(X(1/2))]+19f(A)\tfrac89\,\mathbf{E}[f(X(1/2))] + \tfrac19 f(A)98​E[f(X(1/2))]+91​f(A). A statement with the maximum of the two terms, with exact values ω~=ω\tilde\omega = \omegaω~=ω, or with the o(1)o(1)o(1) replaced by an existential constant or a limit, is a different (and weaker or stronger) theorem and does not close this mission.
  • Printed slip corrected: in the second display on p. 1140, the "===" before −∣A∖C∣ OPT/(2n2)-|A \setminus C|\,OPT/(2n^2)−∣A∖C∣OPT/(2n2) should be "≥\ge≥"; milestone 6 states the inequality.

Welcome contributions: proofs of Lemmas 2.2 and 2.3 (reusable for mission IV of this series), the identity E[f(R∪{x})−f(R)]=12ω(x)\mathbf{E}[f(R \cup \{x\}) - f(R)] = \tfrac12\omega(x)E[f(R∪{x})−f(R)]=21​ω(x), and general lemmas about the operator FFF (splitting a uniform random set along a partition).

Selected references

  • U. Feige, V. S. Mirrokni, J. Vondrák, Maximizing Non-Monotone Submodular Functions, SIAM J. Comput. 40(4):1133–1153, 2011. https://doi.org/10.1137/090779346
  • N. Buchbinder, M. Feldman, J. Naor, R. Schwartz, A Tight Linear Time (1/2)-Approximation for Unconstrained Submodular Maximization, SIAM J. Comput. 44(5):1384–1402, 2015. https://doi.org/10.1137/130929205
12 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
OptimizationProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

On Properties of Stochastic Inventory Systems IV: The (Q, r) Cost Is Flatter in the Order Quantity than the EOQ CostResearch Paper

Motivation

The continuous-review (Q,r)(Q, r)(Q,r) policy is the standard replenishment rule of inventory theory: whenever the inventory position (stock on hand plus on order minus backorders) drops to the reorder point rrr, order a fixed order quantity QQQ. It is used in practice and taught in every operations management course, usually after the deterministic economic order quantity (EOQ) model, which is the same system with a constant demand stream.

Practitioners and textbooks rely on a robustness property of the EOQ: its cost is very insensitive to the choice of order quantity. If the order quantity is off by a factor α\alphaα, the cost rises only by the factor 12(α+1/α)\tfrac12(\alpha + 1/\alpha)21​(α+1/α); ordering 50% too much costs about 8% extra. The insensitivity of the stochastic (Q,r)(Q, r)(Q,r) system to its control parameters had been observed numerically (Wagner, O'Hagan and Lundh 1965; Naddor 1975; Archibald and Silver 1978), but, as Zheng notes, no analytical result on it was known.

Timeline:

  • 1963: Hadley and Whitin derive the (Q,r)(Q, r)(Q,r) cost for Poisson demand.
  • 1986: Zipkin proves that the average backorders of a (Q,r)(Q,r)(Q,r) policy are jointly convex in (Q,r)(Q, r)(Q,r) under continuous demand (Zipkin 1986).
  • 1992: Zheng derives simple optimality conditions for the continuous (Q,r)(Q, r)(Q,r) model and compares it with the EOQ model under the same cost structure. One of the results is that the stochastic cost curve is flatter in the order quantity than the EOQ curve (Zheng 1992). This mission formalizes that result.

Setting

Demands arrive at rate λ>0\lambda>0λ>0; orders arrive after a fixed leadtime L>0L>0L>0; all stockouts are backordered. Each order costs K>0K>0K>0; holding costs accrue at rate h>0h>0h>0 per unit in stock and penalty costs at rate p>0p>0p>0 per unit backordered. The leadtime demand D≥0D\ge 0D≥0 has distribution μ\muμ with finite mean E(D)=λLE(D) = \lambda LE(D)=λL.

The inventory cost rate at inventory position yyy is

G(y)=E[h(y−D)++p(D−y)+],G(y) = E\big[h(y-D)^+ + p(D-y)^+\big],G(y)=E[h(y−D)++p(D−y)+],

assumed to attain its minimum at a unique point y0y^0y0. The long-run average cost of the policy (Q,r)(Q, r)(Q,r) is

c(Q,r)=λK+∫rr+QG(y) dyQ,Q>0.c(Q, r) = \frac{\lambda K + \int_r^{r+Q} G(y)\,dy}{Q}, \qquad Q>0.c(Q,r)=QλK+∫rr+Q​G(y)dy​,Q>0.

For fixed Q>0Q>0Q>0 let r(Q)r(Q)r(Q) be a reorder point minimizing c(Q,⋅)c(Q,\cdot)c(Q,⋅), and let

C(Q)=c(Q,r(Q)),H(Q)=G(r(Q)) (Q>0),H(0)=G(y0).C(Q) = c(Q, r(Q)), \qquad H(Q) = G(r(Q))\ (Q>0), \quad H(0) = G(y^0).C(Q)=c(Q,r(Q)),H(Q)=G(r(Q)) (Q>0),H(0)=G(y0).

CCC is the cost of the order quantity QQQ when the reorder point is always chosen optimally for it. An optimal order quantity Q∗Q^*Q∗ minimizes CCC over Q>0Q>0Q>0, and C∗=C(Q∗)C^* = C(Q^*)C∗=C(Q∗).

The EOQ model is the same system with the constant leadtime demand λL\lambda LλL. Its cost rate is Gd(y)=h(y−λL)++p(λL−y)+G_d(y) = h(y-\lambda L)^+ + p(\lambda L-y)^+Gd​(y)=h(y−λL)++p(λL−y)+, and rdr_drd​, HdH_dHd​, CdC_dCd​ are the objects above at GdG_dGd​, with optimum Qd∗Q^*_dQd∗​ and Cd∗C^*_dCd∗​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4

C(αQ∗)C∗≤12(α+1α)∀α>0.\frac{C(\alpha Q^*)}{C^*} \le \frac12\left(\alpha + \frac1\alpha\right) \qquad \forall \alpha>0.C∗C(αQ∗)​≤21​(α+α1​)∀α>0.

The goal holds for every demand distribution satisfying the standing assumptions and every optimal Q∗Q^*Q∗. Both regimes, α<1\alpha<1α<1 and α>1\alpha>1α>1, are included.

Milestones

In the order the proof uses them:

  1. Eq. (7): ∫r(Q)r(Q)+QG=∫0QH\int_{r(Q)}^{r(Q)+Q} G = \int_0^Q H∫r(Q)r(Q)+Q​G=∫0Q​H, hence C(Q)=(λK+∫0QH(y)dy)/QC(Q) = \big(\lambda K + \int_0^Q H(y)dy\big)/QC(Q)=(λK+∫0Q​H(y)dy)/Q for Q>0Q>0Q>0.
  2. Lemma 4: HHH is increasing and convex on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) with asymptotic slope hp/(h+p)hp/(h+p)hp/(h+p).
  3. Eq. (8): an optimal Q∗Q^*Q∗ exists, and Q>0Q>0Q>0 is optimal iff H(Q)=C(Q)H(Q) = C(Q)H(Q)=C(Q).
  4. Eq. (18): Hd(Q)=hph+pQH_d(Q) = \frac{hp}{h+p}QHd​(Q)=h+php​Q, with rd(Q)=λL−hh+pQr_d(Q) = \lambda L - \frac{h}{h+p}Qrd​(Q)=λL−h+ph​Q.
  5. Lemma 7: H0(Q)≤Hd(Q)≤H(Q)H_0(Q) \le H_d(Q) \le H(Q)H0​(Q)≤Hd​(Q)≤H(Q) and A(Q)≤Ad(Q)A(Q)\le A_d(Q)A(Q)≤Ad​(Q), where H0=H−G(y0)H_0 = H - G(y^0)H0​=H−G(y0) and A(Q)=QH(Q)−∫0QHA(Q) = QH(Q) - \int_0^Q HA(Q)=QH(Q)−∫0Q​H.
  6. Eqs. (26)–(27): H(αQ)≤αH(Q)H(\alpha Q)\le \alpha H(Q)H(αQ)≤αH(Q) for α>1\alpha>1α>1 and H(αQ)≥αH(Q)H(\alpha Q)\ge\alpha H(Q)H(αQ)≥αH(Q) for 0<α<10<\alpha<10<α<1.
  7. Lemma 9: ∫QαQH(y) dy≤α2−12 QH(Q)\int_Q^{\alpha Q} H(y)\,dy \le \frac{\alpha^2-1}{2}\,Q H(Q)∫QαQ​H(y)dy≤2α2−1​QH(Q) for all α>0\alpha>0α>0, Q>0Q>0Q>0.

Significance

In the EOQ model the relative cost of a scaled order quantity is exactly Cd(αQd∗)/Cd∗=12(α+1/α)C_d(\alpha Q^*_d)/C^*_d = \tfrac12(\alpha + 1/\alpha)Cd​(αQd∗​)/Cd∗​=21​(α+1/α) (Eq. (25) of the paper). Theorem 4 shows that the stochastic system is at least as forgiving. The bound holds for every leadtime-demand distribution with a unique newsvendor minimizer, and it does not depend on the parameters KKK, hhh, ppp, λ\lambdaλ or LLL. Because the reorder point is re-optimized for each quantity, the bound applies to the practical question of how much a misestimated lot size costs when the safety stock is set correctly.

Together with the other results of the paper (the 1/81/81/8 bound for the EOQ heuristic and the bounds between Q∗Q^*Q∗ and Qd∗Q^*_dQd∗​, which are separate missions of this series), it gives a closed-form account of why the EOQ is a good heuristic for stochastic systems.

The result has a complete published proof. It has not been machine-checked. The work that remains is a formal proof for general distributions: the paper differentiates GGG and r(Q)r(Q)r(Q) twice, and a formal proof has to replace those derivatives with arguments that need no density.

Difficulty

C(Q)C(Q)C(Q) is defined through an inner minimization over the reorder point, so its shape in QQQ is controlled by the implicitly defined function H(Q)=G(r(Q))H(Q) = G(r(Q))H(Q)=G(r(Q)) rather than by GGG directly. The obvious approach would bound C(αQ∗)C(\alpha Q^*)C(αQ∗) with the reorder point fixed at r(Q∗)r(Q^*)r(Q∗). That approach is the wrong comparison: it bounds a larger quantity, and the resulting bound depends on the distribution.

The paper's proof uses three properties of HHH: that it is convex, that its slope never exceeds the EOQ slope hp/(h+p)hp/(h+p)hp/(h+p), and that it dominates HdH_dHd​. The paper obtains these from the derivatives r′(Q)r'(Q)r′(Q) and H′(Q)H'(Q)H′(Q) under a smooth demand distribution. Without a density, r(Q)r(Q)r(Q) is only an argmin and HHH need not be differentiable, so none of these three properties can be read off a derivative formula; the asymptotic slope in particular depends on the finite mean E(D)=λLE(D) = \lambda LE(D)=λL and on the behaviour of GGG at ±∞\pm\infty±∞.

Formalization scope

The mission is set in Lean 4 with Mathlib. All objects are real valued.

  • Model. The structure QRModel bundles λ,L,K,h,p>0\lambda, L, K, h, p>0λ,L,K,h,p>0, a probability measure μ\muμ on R\mathbb{R}R with integrable identity, ∫x dμ=λL\int x\,d\mu = \lambda L∫xdμ=λL, D≥0D\ge 0D≥0 almost surely, and the unique-minimizer hypothesis on GGG. K>0K>0K>0 is implicit in the paper and made explicit here. No density is assumed; deterministic and discrete demands are allowed, and the paper's own numerical study uses Poisson demand.
  • Generic machinery. ccc, r(Q)r(Q)r(Q), y0y^0y0, HHH, H0H_0H0​, CCC and AAA are defined for an arbitrary cost rate and instantiated at GGG and at GdG_dGd​. r(Q)r(Q)r(Q) and y0y^0y0 are chosen minimizers; they are never defined by the equation G(r)=G(r+Q)G(r) = G(r+Q)G(r)=G(r+Q), which is a lemma of the paper. H(0)=G(y0)H(0) = G(y^0)H(0)=G(y0). Values at Q<0Q<0Q<0 (and of ccc, CCC at Q≤0Q\le 0Q≤0) are junk, and every statement restricts to Q>0Q>0Q>0 or Q≥0Q\ge 0Q≥0.
  • Readings of informal words. "Increasing" in Lemma 4 is strict on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), since the proof shows H′>0H'>0H′>0. "Asymptotic slope hp/(h+p)hp/(h+p)hp/(h+p)" is stated as H(Q)/Q→hp/(h+p)H(Q)/Q\to hp/(h+p)H(Q)/Q→hp/(h+p) together with the chord bound H(Q2)−H(Q1)≤hph+p(Q2−Q1)H(Q_2)-H(Q_1)\le \frac{hp}{h+p}(Q_2-Q_1)H(Q2​)−H(Q1​)≤h+php​(Q2​−Q1​) for 0≤Q1≤Q20\le Q_1\le Q_20≤Q1​≤Q2​. The chord bound is the derivative-free form of H′≤hp/(h+p)H'\le hp/(h+p)H′≤hp/(h+p) that the proofs of Lemmas 7–9 use. "The optimal order quantity" is IsOptQty Q, meaning Q>0Q>0Q>0 and C(Q)≤C(Q′)C(Q)\le C(Q')C(Q)≤C(Q′) for all Q′>0Q'>0Q′>0. Its existence is asserted in the Eq. (8) milestone, so the goal is not vacuous. "∀α>0\forall\alpha>0∀α>0" is a real α>0\alpha>0α>0 with real division 1/α1/\alpha1/α. In Lemma 9 the integral ∫QαQ\int_Q^{\alpha Q}∫QαQ​ is oriented, as on the page.
  • Ruling out trivializations. C(αQ∗)C(\alpha Q^*)C(αQ∗) re-optimizes the reorder point for αQ∗\alpha Q^*αQ∗; holding it at r(Q∗)r(Q^*)r(Q∗) would be a different theorem. C∗>0C^*>0C∗>0 is a consequence of the model, not a hypothesis.

A complete development needs the following:

  • integrability and continuity of GGG;
  • existence of the optimal reorder point;
  • convexity of HHH;
  • the asymptotics G−Gd→0G - G_d\to 0G−Gd​→0 at ±∞\pm\infty±∞;
  • Jensen's inequality Gd≤GG_d\le GGd​≤G (Eq. (22));
  • existence of Q∗Q^*Q∗.

These facts about newsvendor cost functions are reusable in the other missions of this series. Contributions of any of them as separate lemmas are welcome.

Selected references

  • Y.-S. Zheng, On Properties of Stochastic Inventory Systems, Management Science 38(1):87–103, 1992. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.38.1.87
  • P. H. Zipkin, Inventory Service-Level Measures: Convexity and Approximation, Management Science 32(8):975–981, 1986. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.32.8.975
  • G. Hadley and T. M. Whitin, Analysis of Inventory Systems, Prentice-Hall, 1963.
  • H. M. Wagner, M. O'Hagan and B. Lundh, An Empirical Study of Exactly and Approximately Optimal Inventory Policies, Management Science 11(7):690–723, 1965. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.11.7.690
  • A. Federgruen and Y.-S. Zheng, An Efficient Algorithm for Computing an Optimal (r, Q) Policy in Continuous Review Stochastic Inventory Systems, Operations Research 40(4):808–813, 1992. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.40.4.808
11 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
OptimizationProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

On Properties of Stochastic Inventory Systems II: The Optimal Order Quantity of the Stochastic (Q, r) Model Exceeds the EOQ by a Bounded GapResearch Paper

Motivation

The continuous-review (Q,r)(Q, r)(Q,r) policy is the standard control rule for a single stocked item with random demand: whenever the inventory position falls to the reorder point rrr, an order of fixed size QQQ is placed. It is implemented in a large share of commercial inventory systems. Choosing the two parameters jointly has traditionally required numerical search (Hadley and Whitin, 1963; Federgruen and Zheng, 1992). In practice the order quantity is therefore often taken from the deterministic economic order quantity (EOQ) formula with backorders, and the reorder point is then set for the random demand.

Zheng (1992) turned this practice into a question with an exact answer: how does the optimal order quantity Q∗Q^*Q∗ of the stochastic model compare with the EOQ quantity Qd∗Q^*_dQd∗​ computed from the same cost data and the same mean demand? Its Theorem 2 answers it with a two-sided bound. This mission formalizes that theorem. Companion missions of the same series formalize the paper's cost bounds (Theorem 3), the flatness of the cost curve (Theorem 4) and the 1/81/81/8 bound on the cost of using the EOQ quantity (Theorem 5).

Setting

Demand arrives at rate λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0 and replenishment orders arrive after a fixed leadtime L>0L > 0L>0. Shortages are backordered. Holding costs accrue at rate h>0h > 0h>0 per unit held, backorder penalties at rate p>0p > 0p>0 per unit short, and every order costs K>0K > 0K>0. The leadtime demand DDD is a nonnegative random variable with law μ\muμ and mean E(D)=λL\mathbb{E}(D) = \lambda LE(D)=λL. The expected inventory cost rate at inventory position yyy is the newsvendor cost

G(y)=E[h(y−D)++p(D−y)+],G(y) = \mathbb{E}\big[h(y - D)^+ + p(D - y)^+\big],G(y)=E[h(y−D)++p(D−y)+],

assumed, as in the paper, to attain its minimum at a unique point y0y^0y0. The long-run average cost of the policy (Q,r)(Q, r)(Q,r) is

c(Q,r)=λK+∫rr+QG(y) dyQ.c(Q, r) = \frac{\lambda K + \int_r^{r+Q} G(y)\,dy}{Q}.c(Q,r)=QλK+∫rr+Q​G(y)dy​.

For each Q>0Q > 0Q>0, let r(Q)r(Q)r(Q) be an optimal reorder point, i.e. a minimizer of c(Q,⋅)c(Q, \cdot)c(Q,⋅). The analysis runs through the curves

H(Q)=G(r(Q)) (Q>0),H(0)=G(y0),H0(Q)=H(Q)−G(y0),A(Q)=QH(Q)−∫0QH(y) dy,H(Q) = G(r(Q))\ (Q > 0),\quad H(0) = G(y^0),\qquad H_0(Q) = H(Q) - G(y^0),\qquad A(Q) = QH(Q) - \int_0^Q H(y)\,dy,H(Q)=G(r(Q)) (Q>0),H(0)=G(y0),H0​(Q)=H(Q)−G(y0),A(Q)=QH(Q)−∫0Q​H(y)dy,

and through the cost C(Q)=c(Q,r(Q))C(Q) = c(Q, r(Q))C(Q)=c(Q,r(Q)) of order quantity QQQ with the reorder point set optimally. The optimal order quantity Q∗Q^*Q∗ is the minimizer of CCC over Q>0Q > 0Q>0.

The EOQ model is the case of a constant leadtime demand λL\lambda LλL. Its cost rate is Gd(y)=h(y−λL)++p(λL−y)+G_d(y) = h(y - \lambda L)^+ + p(\lambda L - y)^+Gd​(y)=h(y−λL)++p(λL−y)+, and the same construction gives rdr_drd​, HdH_dHd​, AdA_dAd​ and the optimal quantity

Qd∗=2λK(h+p)hp.Q^*_d = \sqrt{\frac{2\lambda K(h+p)}{hp}}.Qd∗​=hp2λK(h+p)​​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2 (p. 96)

For K>0K > 0K>0, let Qˉ\bar QQˉ​, Qˉ1\bar Q_1Qˉ​1​, Qˉ2\bar Q_2Qˉ​2​ be the positive solutions of

QH0(Q)=2λK,H0(Q)=Hd(Qd∗),∫0QH0(y) dy=λK.Q H_0(Q) = 2\lambda K,\qquad H_0(Q) = H_d(Q^*_d),\qquad \int_0^Q H_0(y)\,dy = \lambda K.QH0​(Q)=2λK,H0​(Q)=Hd​(Qd∗​),∫0Q​H0​(y)dy=λK.

Each has exactly one positive solution, and

Qd∗≤Q∗≤Qˉ,Qˉ≤Qˉ1,Qˉ≤Qˉ2.Q^*_d \le Q^* \le \bar Q,\qquad \bar Q \le \bar Q_1,\qquad \bar Q \le \bar Q_2.Qd∗​≤Q∗≤Qˉ​,Qˉ​≤Qˉ​1​,Qˉ​≤Qˉ​2​.

Moreover, with λ,L,h,p\lambda, L, h, pλ,L,h,p and the demand law fixed, K↦Qˉ1(K)−Qd∗(K)K \mapsto \bar Q_1(K) - Q^*_d(K)K↦Qˉ​1​(K)−Qd∗​(K) is nondecreasing on (0,∞)(0, \infty)(0,∞) and converges to a finite constant as K→∞K \to \inftyK→∞.

Milestones

The milestones are the paper's own numbered results that feed Theorem 2, listed in the order the argument uses them:

  1. Lemma 2 (p. 90): for Q>0Q > 0Q>0, rrr is optimal iff G(r)=G(r+Q)G(r) = G(r + Q)G(r)=G(r+Q).
  2. Eq. (7) (p. 91): C(Q)=(λK+∫0QH(y) dy)/QC(Q) = (\lambda K + \int_0^Q H(y)\,dy)/QC(Q)=(λK+∫0Q​H(y)dy)/Q.
  3. Lemma 4 (p. 91): HHH is increasing and convex with asymptotic slope hp/(h+p)hp/(h+p)hp/(h+p).
  4. Lemma 6 (p. 92): AAA is increasing and convex, and Q=Q∗Q = Q^*Q=Q∗ iff A(Q)=λKA(Q) = \lambda KA(Q)=λK.
  5. Eqs. (18), (20) (p. 94): Hd(Q)=hph+pQH_d(Q) = \frac{hp}{h+p}QHd​(Q)=h+php​Q, and Qd∗Q^*_dQd∗​ is optimal for the EOQ model.
  6. Lemma 7 (p. 95): H0≤Hd≤HH_0 \le H_d \le HH0​≤Hd​≤H and A≤AdA \le A_dA≤Ad​.
  7. Lemma 8 (p. 95): ∫0QH≥12QH(Q)≥A(Q)≥12QH0(Q)≥∫0QH0\int_0^Q H \ge \tfrac12 QH(Q) \ge A(Q) \ge \tfrac12 QH_0(Q) \ge \int_0^Q H_0∫0Q​H≥21​QH(Q)≥A(Q)≥21​QH0​(Q)≥∫0Q​H0​, with equalities for deterministic demand.

Significance

The result. Theorem 2 says that the EOQ formula always underestimates the optimal order quantity when leadtime demand is random. The underestimate is bounded by Qˉ1−Qd∗\bar Q_1 - Q^*_dQˉ​1​−Qd∗​, a quantity that stays bounded however large the ordering cost is. So the relative error of the EOQ quantity vanishes as KKK grows. The first inequality, Qd∗≤Q∗Q^*_d \le Q^*Qd∗​≤Q∗, is also an ingredient of the paper's Theorem 3 (cost bounds) and Theorem 5 (the EOQ quantity raises costs by at most 1/81/81/8). The explicit bounds Qˉ\bar QQˉ​, Qˉ1\bar Q_1Qˉ​1​, Qˉ2\bar Q_2Qˉ​2​ bracket Q∗Q^*Q∗ and give a search interval for it.

Formalizing it. The theorem has been proved on paper since 1992. No machine-checked version of it, or of the continuous-review (Q,r)(Q, r)(Q,r) cost of Eq. (1), exists on this platform. The inventory items already here treat the discrete cost with integer order quantities, a normally distributed demand, or the EOQ without backorders. This mission provides a machine-checked version of the paper's optimality conditions for a general demand distribution. The paper's argument differentiates GGG twice, i.e. it tacitly assumes a density. The formal statements do not, so a formal proof must redo those steps with one-sided (convexity) arguments. The printed argument for the limit in part (b) shows only that a derivative tends to zero. A complete proof of convergence is part of the work.

Difficulty

The obvious route to Qd∗≤Q∗Q^*_d \le Q^*Qd∗​≤Q∗ compares the two cost curves CCC and CdC_dCd​ directly. It fails because C≥CdC \ge C_dC≥Cd​ pointwise, and a pointwise inequality between two convex functions says nothing about the order of their minimizers. The stochastic curve HHH is defined only implicitly, as GGG evaluated at a minimizer of a parametric integral, so its growth relative to the linear HdH_dHd​ has to be established before any comparison of order quantities. For part (b), a vanishing derivative does not imply convergence (log⁡K\log KlogK also has a vanishing derivative), so the printed proof of the limit does not go through as written.

Without a density, r(Q)r(Q)r(Q) need not be differentiable. Every derivative in the paper's proofs (of rrr, HHH and AAA) must be replaced by monotonicity or chord arguments.

Formalization scope

The Lean development uses the namespace ZhengQR.OrderQty. Its conventions:

  • Parameters. λ,L,K,h,p\lambda, L, K, h, pλ,L,K,h,p are reals, all assumed strictly positive. K>0K > 0K>0 is implicit in the paper; at K=0K = 0K=0 the optimal quantity degenerates.
  • Demand. The law μ\muμ of DDD is a probability measure on R\mathbb{R}R that is integrable, has mean λL\lambda LλL and is carried by [0,∞)[0, \infty)[0,∞). No density is assumed, so discrete laws such as the Poisson of the paper's §4 are allowed.
  • Standing assumption. GGG has a unique global minimizer (p. 90). It is a hypothesis of every statement about the stochastic model.
  • Generic machinery. ccc, r(Q)r(Q)r(Q), y0y^0y0, HHH, CCC, AAA, H0H_0H0​ and optimality of QQQ are defined for an arbitrary cost rate GGG and applied to both the newsvendor cost and GdG_dGd​. So Eqs. (18) and (20) are theorems, not definitions. r(Q)r(Q)r(Q) and y0y^0y0 are chosen minimizers, never solutions of Lemma 2's equation. r(Q)r(Q)r(Q) minimizes ∫rr+QG\int_r^{r+Q}G∫rr+Q​G, which for Q>0Q > 0Q>0 has the same minimizers as c(Q,⋅)c(Q, \cdot)c(Q,⋅), so HHH, H0H_0H0​ and AAA do not depend on KKK.
  • Domains. HHH, H0H_0H0​ and AAA are used on [0,∞)[0, \infty)[0,∞), ccc and CCC for Q>0Q > 0Q>0 only, and Q∗Q^*Q∗ is a Q>0Q > 0Q>0 minimizing CCC over (0,∞)(0, \infty)(0,∞).
  • Readings of informal words.
    • Lemma 4's "increasing" and Lemma 6's "increasing/decreasing" mean strictly.
    • Lemma 4's "asymptotic slope hp/(h+p)hp/(h+p)hp/(h+p)" means H(Q)/Q→hp/(h+p)H(Q)/Q \to hp/(h+p)H(Q)/Q→hp/(h+p) together with the chord bound H(Q′)−H(Q)≤hph+p(Q′−Q)H(Q') - H(Q) \le \frac{hp}{h+p}(Q' - Q)H(Q′)−H(Q)≤h+php​(Q′−Q) for 0≤Q<Q′0 \le Q < Q'0≤Q<Q′.
    • "Qˉ=def{Q:… }\bar Q \overset{\text{def}}{=} \{Q : \dots\}Qˉ​=def{Q:…}" means the unique positive solution. The goal quantifies over every positive solution and separately asserts that exactly one exists.
    • Theorem 2's "increasing function of KKK" means nondecreasing, which is what the paper's proof establishes (a nonnegative derivative).
    • "Converges to a constant" means a finite real limit.
    • Lemma 8's "the leadtime demand is deterministic" means the EOQ model with cost rate GdG_dGd​.
  • Ruling out trivial readings. The goal's hypotheses are satisfiable (for example by a deterministic leadtime demand). Existence of Q∗Q^*Q∗ (Lemma 6) and of Qˉ\bar QQˉ​, Qˉ1\bar Q_1Qˉ​1​, Qˉ2\bar Q_2Qˉ​2​ (the goal itself) is asserted, so neither the bounds nor the limit hold vacuously.

Infrastructure needed includes the following. Much of it is reusable for any single-item inventory model:

  • differentiation under the expectation, or one-sided substitutes, for GGG;
  • convexity of HHH as the inverse of the width of the sublevel sets of GGG;
  • the envelope identity behind Eq. (7);
  • elementary convex-analysis facts about chords.

Contributions welcome: proofs of the milestones in any order, general lemmas on the newsvendor cost, and a complete convergence argument for part (b).

Selected references

  • Y.-S. Zheng, On Properties of Stochastic Inventory Systems, Management Science 38(1):87–103, 1992. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.38.1.87
  • A. Federgruen, Y.-S. Zheng, An Efficient Algorithm for Computing an Optimal (r, Q) Policy in Continuous Review Stochastic Inventory Systems, Operations Research 40(4):808–813, 1992. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.40.4.808
10 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
AnalysisNumerical AnalysisOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

A Nonsmooth Version of Newton's Method I: local superlinear convergence of the generalized-Jacobian Newton method at a semismooth regular rootResearch Paper

Motivation

Many problems in optimization and equilibrium modelling reduce to a system of equations F(x)=0F(x) = 0F(x)=0 whose map F:Rn→RnF : \mathbb R^n \to \mathbb R^nF:Rn→Rn is Lipschitz but not differentiable: reformulations of nonlinear complementarity problems through the componentwise minimum or the Fischer–Burmeister function, Karush–Kuhn–Tucker systems of constrained programs, and gradients of augmented Lagrangians all have kinks. Newton's method, xk+1=xk−F′(xk)−1F(xk)x^{k+1} = x^k - F'(x^k)^{-1}F(x^k)xk+1=xk−F′(xk)−1F(xk), is the standard fast local solver for smooth systems, but it needs a derivative at every iterate.

Qi and Sun (Math. Programming 58, 1993) replaced the Jacobian by an arbitrary element of Clarke's generalized Jacobian and showed that the resulting method converges locally superlinearly under a regularity condition they called semismoothness, extending Mifflin's notion for functionals (Mifflin, SIAM J. Control Optim. 15, 1977) to vector-valued maps. This theorem is the foundation of the family of semismooth Newton methods used in complementarity, variational inequalities and PDE-constrained optimization.

Timeline. Robinson (1988) and Pang (Math. OR 15, 1990) studied Newton methods built on B-derivatives, with convergence proved under a strong Fréchet derivative at the solution; Kummer (1988) gave an abstract framework for Newton methods for nonsmooth equations; Qi and Sun (1993) proved local superlinear convergence for the generalized-Jacobian iteration under semismoothness and nonsingularity of ∂F(x∗)\partial F(x^*)∂F(x∗), with order 1+p1+p1+p under ppp-order semismoothness.

Setting

Let F:Rn→RmF : \mathbb R^n \to \mathbb R^mF:Rn→Rm be locally Lipschitz. By Rademacher's theorem FFF is differentiable on a set DFD_FDF​ of full measure; write JF(y)JF(y)JF(y) for the Jacobian at y∈DFy \in D_Fy∈DF​. The generalized Jacobian is

∂F(x)=co{lim⁡i→∞JF(xi):xi→x, xi∈DF},\partial F(x) = \mathrm{co}\Big\{\lim_{i\to\infty} JF(x_i) : x_i \to x,\ x_i \in D_F\Big\},∂F(x)=co{i→∞lim​JF(xi​):xi​→x, xi​∈DF​},

the convex hull of all limits of Jacobians along sequences of differentiability points converging to xxx. The one-sided directional derivative is F′(x;h)=lim⁡t↓0(F(x+th)−F(x))/tF'(x;h) = \lim_{t\downarrow 0}(F(x+th)-F(x))/tF′(x;h)=limt↓0​(F(x+th)−F(x))/t.

FFF is semismooth at xxx if it is Lipschitz near xxx and, for every hhh, the limit of Vh′Vh'Vh′ over V∈∂F(x+th′)V \in \partial F(x+th')V∈∂F(x+th′), h′→hh' \to hh′→h, t↓0t \downarrow 0t↓0 exists. For 0<p≤10 < p \le 10<p≤1, FFF is ppp-order semismooth at xxx if in addition Vh−F′(x;h)=O(∥h∥1+p)Vh - F'(x;h) = O(\|h\|^{1+p})Vh−F′(x;h)=O(∥h∥1+p) for V∈∂F(x+h)V \in \partial F(x+h)V∈∂F(x+h), h→0h \to 0h→0.

For m=nm = nm=n, the nonsmooth Newton method is

xk+1=xk−Vk−1F(xk),Vk∈∂F(xk),(3.2)x^{k+1} = x^k - V_k^{-1}F(x^k), \qquad V_k \in \partial F(x^k), \tag{3.2}xk+1=xk−Vk−1​F(xk),Vk​∈∂F(xk),(3.2)

where any element of ∂F(xk)\partial F(x^k)∂F(xk) may be chosen at each step. A run is a pair of sequences (xk)(x^k)(xk), (Vk)(V_k)(Vk​) with Vk∈∂F(xk)V_k \in \partial F(x^k)Vk​∈∂F(xk) and Vk(xk+1−xk)=−F(xk)V_k(x^{k+1}-x^k) = -F(x^k)Vk​(xk+1−xk)=−F(xk) for all kkk. A root x∗x^*x∗ (F(x∗)=0F(x^*) = 0F(x∗)=0) is regular when every V∈∂F(x∗)V \in \partial F(x^*)V∈∂F(x∗) is nonsingular.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.2, local superlinear convergence

Let FFF be locally Lipschitz, F(x∗)=0F(x^*) = 0F(x∗)=0, FFF semismooth at x∗x^*x∗, and every V∈∂F(x∗)V \in \partial F(x^*)V∈∂F(x∗) nonsingular. Then there is δ>0\delta > 0δ>0 such that every V∈∂F(y)V \in \partial F(y)V∈∂F(y) with ∥y−x∗∥<δ\|y - x^*\| < \delta∥y−x∗∥<δ is nonsingular, a Newton step from such a yyy stays within δ\deltaδ of x∗x^*x∗, and every run with ∥x0−x∗∥<δ\|x^0 - x^*\| < \delta∥x0−x∗∥<δ satisfies

xk→x∗,∥xk+1−x∗∥=o(∥xk−x∗∥).x^k \to x^*, \qquad \|x^{k+1} - x^*\| = o(\|x^k - x^*\|).xk→x∗,∥xk+1−x∗∥=o(∥xk−x∗∥).

The goal asserts only the shape of the convergence (superlinear) and fixes no constants.

Stronger: Theorem 3.2, order 1+p1 + p1+p

If moreover FFF is ppp-order semismooth at x∗x^*x∗, 0<p≤10 < p \le 10<p≤1, there are δ>0\delta > 0δ>0 and CCC with

∥xk+1−x∗∥≤C∥xk−x∗∥1+p\|x^{k+1} - x^*\| \le C\|x^k - x^*\|^{1+p}∥xk+1−x∗∥≤C∥xk−x∗∥1+p

for every run started within δ\deltaδ of x∗x^*x∗.

Milestones

The milestones follow the paper's route: Proposition 2.1 (the limit in the definition of semismoothness is the directional derivative), Lemma 2.2 (Lipschitz continuity of F′(x;⋅)F'(x;\cdot)F′(x;⋅) and its realisation by an element of ∂F(x)\partial F(x)∂F(x)), Theorem 2.3 (semismoothness is equivalent to Vh−F′(x;h)=o(∥h∥)Vh - F'(x;h) = o(\|h\|)Vh−F′(x;h)=o(∥h∥) and to the corresponding condition at differentiability points), the Remark's expansion (2.17), Proposition 3.1 (uniform invertibility near a regular point), the order-(1+p)(1+p)(1+p) sentence of Theorem 3.2, and Corollary 2.5 (strong Fréchet differentiability implies semismoothness).

Significance

The theorem gives a locally superlinearly convergent method for Lipschitz equations with no smoothness beyond semismoothness at the root. Convex, smooth and subsmooth functions are semismooth, as are sums and scalar products of semismooth functions (the paper, citing Mifflin), and later work showed that the complementarity and KKT reformulations on which semismooth Newton solvers are built are semismooth as well; the order-(1+p)(1+p)(1+p) variant gives local quadratic convergence for strongly semismooth maps. Mission II of this series treats the paper's global convergence theorem on a ball, and Mission III the semismoothness of augmented Lagrangian gradients, which supplies the application.

The results are proved in the paper. No machine-checked version of the generalized Jacobian, of semismoothness or of the nonsmooth Newton method is known to exist in Mathlib or on this platform; the platform's formalized Newton results concern one-dimensional C2C^2C2 functions (MetodosNumericos.newton_local_convergence) and smooth convex minimization. A complete development would provide the first formal library for Clarke's generalized Jacobian and semismooth maps.

Difficulty

The classical Newton proof compares F(xk)F(x^k)F(xk) with its linearization JF(x∗)(xk−x∗)JF(x^*)(x^k - x^*)JF(x∗)(xk−x∗) and uses continuity of the Jacobian at x∗x^*x∗. Here neither is available: FFF need not be differentiable at x∗x^*x∗ or at any iterate, the element VkV_kVk​ is chosen arbitrarily from a set, and VkV_kVk​ need not be close to any fixed linear map. The comparison has to go through the directional derivative F′(x∗;⋅)F'(x^*; \cdot)F′(x∗;⋅), which is only positively homogeneous, not linear. The analytic content therefore sits in Section 2: showing that semismoothness, defined through a limit over a set-valued map, controls Vh−F′(x;h)Vh - F'(x;h)Vh−F′(x;h) uniformly in the direction, and that F(x+h)−F(x)−F′(x;h)F(x+h) - F(x) - F'(x;h)F(x+h)−F(x)−F′(x;h) is small. Both rest on Clarke's mean-value inclusion and on compactness and upper semicontinuity of ∂F\partial F∂F, none of which is in Mathlib. The superlinear rate also requires a uniform bound on ∥V−1∥\|V^{-1}\|∥V−1∥ in a whole neighbourhood, not just at x∗x^*x∗.

Formalization scope

Everything lives in the namespace NonsmoothNewton.Local. Section 2 results are stated for maps between finite-dimensional real normed spaces E→GE \to GE→G (the paper's Rn→Rm\mathbb R^n \to \mathbb R^mRn→Rm is the Euclidean instance); Section 3 results use EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n). Conventions fixed by the Lean statements:

  • JFJFJF is fderiv; the generalized Jacobian is the convex hull (no closure) of limits of fderiv along sequences xi→xx_i \to xxi​→x of differentiability points.
  • F′(x;h)F'(x;h)F′(x;h) is the one-sided limit over t↓0t \downarrow 0t↓0, never the two-sided lineDeriv; its value is a limUnder, used only where existence is a hypothesis or a consequence.
  • Nonsingular means IsUnit in the ring of continuous linear endomorphisms; ∥V−1∥≤C\|V^{-1}\| \le C∥V−1∥≤C is a two-sided inverse of operator norm at most CCC.
  • A run of (3.2) is encoded by the linear equation Vk(xk+1−xk)=−F(xk)V_k(x^{k+1} - x^k) = -F(x^k)Vk​(xk+1−xk)=−F(xk) with Vk∈∂F(xk)V_k \in \partial F(x^k)Vk​∈∂F(xk); all choices of VkV_kVk​ are quantified, and δ\deltaδ is chosen before the run.
  • Pinned asymptotics. The goal's rate is the proof's display (3.3), stated as IsLittleO along atTop; the printed Theorem 3.2 states only well-definedness and convergence. "Order 1+p1+p1+p" is pinned as ∥xk+1−x∗∥≤C∥xk−x∗∥1+p\|x^{k+1}-x^*\| \le C\|x^k-x^*\|^{1+p}∥xk+1−x∗∥≤C∥xk−x∗∥1+p with δ\deltaδ and CCC uniform over runs. Every o(∥h∥)o(\|h\|)o(∥h∥) in (2.8), (2.9) and (2.17) is its ε\varepsilonε–δ\deltaδ form with a non-strict inequality ≤ε∥h∥\le \varepsilon\|h\|≤ε∥h∥, and every O(∥h∥1+p)O(\|h\|^{1+p})O(∥h∥1+p) is an explicit constant and radius.
  • The standing assumptions "FFF locally Lipschitzian" of Sections 2 and 3 are hypotheses of every statement.
  • The strong Fréchet derivative of Corollary 2.5 is Mathlib's HasStrictFDerivAt, which corrects the misprint F(x)F(x)F(x) for F(z)F(z)F(z) in the paper's display (2.16).

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: the update is not written with a junk inverse (which would make a singular step "well defined"), the generalized Jacobian is the paper's nonempty set rather than one that could be empty, and the theorem quantifies over every run rather than asserting that some run converges.

A complete development needs Clarke's mean-value inclusion (2.2), compactness and upper semicontinuity of ∂F\partial F∂F for locally Lipschitz maps (via Rademacher's theorem, available in Mathlib), and perturbation bounds for inverses of linear maps. The generalized-Jacobian and semismoothness layer is reusable beyond this mission, in particular for Missions II and III of this series. Contributions of proofs of any milestone, and of general lemmas about ∂F\partial F∂F, are welcome.

Selected references

  • L. Qi, J. Sun, A nonsmooth version of Newton's method, Mathematical Programming 58 (1993) 353–367. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01581275
  • F. H. Clarke, Optimization and Nonsmooth Analysis, Wiley, 1983 (SIAM reprint 1990). https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611971309
  • R. Mifflin, Semismooth and semiconvex functions in constrained optimization, SIAM Journal on Control and Optimization 15 (1977) 959–972. https://doi.org/10.1137/0315061
  • J.-S. Pang, Newton's method for B-differentiable equations, Mathematics of Operations Research 15 (1990) 311–341. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.15.2.311
  • J. M. Ortega, W. C. Rheinboldt, Iterative Solution of Nonlinear Equations in Several Variables, Academic Press, 1970 (SIAM reprint 2000). https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9780898719468
14 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
CombinatoricsGraph TheoryOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Shortest Connection Networks And Some Generalizations: Construction Principles P1 and P2 Yield a Shortest Spanning Subtree of Every Connected Labelled GraphResearch Paper

Motivation

Connecting a set of terminals by a network of direct links of least total length is one of the oldest problems of combinatorial optimization. R. C. Prim's 1957 paper in the Bell System Technical Journal (DOI) was motivated by the rate structure for Bell System leased-line services, in which the charge for connecting a set of terminals depends on the length of a shortest network connecting them. The paper states two local construction principles, P1 and P2, and shows that any sequence of their applications produces a shortest network, first for points in the plane and then for arbitrary connected labelled graphs with arbitrary real edge lengths. The paper's §V specialization of the principles, growing a single fragment, is what is now called Prim's algorithm, and its §IV statement is the form of the minimum spanning tree theorem used throughout network design, clustering and approximation algorithms.

Timeline. O. Borůvka (1926) solved the problem for an electrical network in Moravia; V. Jarník (1930) gave the single-fragment procedure; J. B. Kruskal (1956, Proc. AMS 7, 48–50) proved that adding globally shortest links avoiding cycles yields a shortest spanning tree; Prim (1957) gave the more permissive principles P1 and P2, which contain both the Jarník procedure and Kruskal's rule as special orders of application; E. W. Dijkstra (1959) rediscovered the single-fragment procedure.

Setting

Let VVV be a finite set of NNN terminals and GGG a simple graph on VVV, the labelled graph whose edges are the possible links. Each edge eee carries a real length w(e)w(e)w(e); lengths may be negative, zero, or tie. For a finite set FFF of links, H(F)H(F)H(F) denotes the graph on VVV whose edges are the links of FFF.

  • A spanning subtree of GGG is a set FFF of edges of GGG such that H(F)H(F)H(F) is a tree on VVV. Its length is ℓw(F)=∑e∈Fw(e)\ell_w(F) = \sum_{e \in F} w(e)ℓw​(F)=∑e∈F​w(e).
  • A shortest spanning subtree (SSS) is a spanning subtree of least length among all spanning subtrees of GGG. Prim's dictionary is "shortest connection network (SCN) ↔ shortest spanning subtree (SSS)". L(G,w)L(G,w)L(G,w) denotes that least length.
  • Given the links FFF made so far, the connected components of H(F)H(F)H(F) are the isolated terminals (one terminal) and isolated fragments (two or more terminals).
  • Principle 1: any isolated terminal ttt can be connected to a nearest neighbor, a GGG-neighbor nnn with w({t,n})≤w({t,m})w(\{t,n\}) \le w(\{t,m\})w({t,n})≤w({t,m}) for all GGG-neighbors mmm of ttt.
  • Principle 2: any isolated fragment CCC can be connected to a nearest neighbor n∉Cn \notin Cn∈/C by a shortest available link {u,n}\{u,n\}{u,n}, u∈Cu \in Cu∈C; equivalently {u,n}\{u,n\}{u,n} is a shortest edge of GGG with one end in CCC and the other outside.
  • A construction is a sequence of links e0,e1,…e_0, e_1, \dotse0​,e1​,…, each an application of P1 or P2 with respect to the links before it. It is complete when it has N−1N-1N−1 links.

Only edges of GGG are possible links; in Prim's distance table a missing edge has length ∞\infty∞.

Formalization targets

Goal (§IV, p. 1396)

For every finite connected graph GGG and every www,

(∃ a complete construction) ∧ (∀ complete constructions e0,…,eN−2: {e0,…,eN−2} is a SSS of G).\Bigl(\exists\ \text{a complete construction}\Bigr) \ \wedge\ \Bigl(\forall\ \text{complete constructions } e_0,\dots,e_{N-2}:\ \{e_0,\dots,e_{N-2}\} \text{ is a SSS of } G\Bigr).(∃ a complete construction) ∧ (∀ complete constructions e0​,…,eN−2​: {e0​,…,eN−2​} is a SSS of G).

This is the sentence "P1 and P2 will provide a SSS for any connected labelled graph with any set of real edge lengths." It fixes nothing about the order of applications, the component chosen, or the tie-breaking.

Milestones

  1. Counting (§II, p. 1392): after any construction with kkk links, H(F)H(F)H(F) is acyclic with N−kN-kN−k components; a complete construction is a spanning subtree; a construction with fewer than N−1N-1N−1 links can be extended.
  2. Necessary Condition 1 (p. 1392): every terminal of a SSS is linked in it to at least one nearest neighbor.
  3. Necessary Condition 2 (p. 1392): every fragment SSS of a SSS, ∅≠S≠V\emptyset \ne S \ne V∅=S=V, is linked in it to a nearest neighbor by a shortest available link.
  4. Distinct lengths (§III, p. 1393): if the edge lengths are pairwise distinct, every link of every construction belongs to every SSS.
  5. Continuity (§III, p. 1394): w↦L(G,w)w \mapsto L(G,w)w↦L(G,w) is continuous.

Significance

The goal is the correctness theorem of a whole family of greedy minimum spanning tree procedures at once: Jarník–Prim (one growing fragment), Kruskal (globally shortest link first) and Borůvka-style interleavings all produce sequences of P1/P2 applications. Because lengths are arbitrary reals, it also covers maximum spanning trees by a sign change (p. 1397) and graphs that are not complete.

The result is classical and fully proved in the literature. What this mission adds is a machine-checked statement in exactly Prim's generality. Mathlib has spanning trees of connected graphs (SimpleGraph.Connected.exists_isTree_le) and the edge count of trees, but no minimum spanning tree theory. Existing Prove2Me items on minimum spanning trees are either restricted to complete graphs with distance matrices or state a cut property in existence form at a single vertex; none states Prim's principles or his necessary conditions.

Difficulty

The obvious argument, "each link P1 or P2 adds belongs to the shortest network", uses a unique shortest network, and that fails with ties: when two links tie, a P1/P2 link need not lie in a given SSS. Prim's own treatment of ties (§III) is an informal perturbation argument; the formal statement must hold for every tie-breaking choice made during a construction, not only for a generic perturbed instance. Negative lengths remove the easy reading "shortest connected spanning subgraph": the minimum must range over trees only. The statements also involve the component structure of H(F)H(F)H(F) as it changes during a construction, and tree paths in an arbitrary, not necessarily complete, graph.

Formalization scope

Namespace ShortestConnection.Principles, Mathlib SimpleGraph. Conventions:

  • VVV is a Fintype with decidable equality; GGG is a SimpleGraph V (at most one link per pair, no loops, which is Prim's setting). Lengths are w : Sym2 V → ℝ; only values on edges of GGG matter.
  • Link sets are Finset (Sym2 V); linkGraph F is SimpleGraph.fromEdgeSet F. A spanning subtree requires ↑F ⊆ G.edgeSet and (linkGraph F).IsTree.
  • An isolated fragment is a whole connected component of linkGraph F; the P2 condition is a single inequality against every GGG-edge leaving it, which is equivalent to "nearest neighbor and shortest link" in Prim's sense.
  • A construction is a List (Sym2 V) checked entrywise against l.take i; complete means length Fintype.card V - 1 (natural subtraction, used only for nonempty VVV).
  • LLL is sInf of the lengths of spanning subtrees; continuity is in the product topology.

Implicit hypotheses made explicit: GGG connected (hence V≠∅V \ne \emptysetV=∅) wherever an SSS or a complete construction is involved; at least two terminals for Necessary Condition 1; SSS nonempty and S≠VS \ne VS=V for Necessary Condition 2; pairwise distinct edge lengths only in milestone 4, as in the paper's temporary assumption.

The goal's existence clause rules out a vacuous formalization in which no complete construction exists; the step predicates are defined from lengths and components only, never through shortest spanning subtrees, and they are not restricted to one growing fragment or to the globally shortest link.

Needed infrastructure: tree exchange (adding an edge to a spanning tree creates one cycle; removing any other cycle edge yields a spanning tree), component counts under edge addition, and minima of finitely many continuous functions. The exchange and counting lemmas are reusable for any matroid-greedy or spanning-tree mission. Contributions of intermediate lemmas, and proofs of the milestones in any order, are welcome.

Selected references

  • R. C. Prim, Shortest Connection Networks And Some Generalizations, Bell System Technical Journal 36 (1957), 1389–1401. https://doi.org/10.1002/j.1538-7305.1957.tb01515.x
  • J. B. Kruskal, On the shortest spanning subtree of a graph and the traveling salesman problem, Proceedings of the AMS 7 (1956), 48–50. https://doi.org/10.1090/S0002-9939-1956-0078686-7
  • V. Jarník, O jistém problému minimálním, Práce Moravské Přírodovědecké Společnosti 6 (1930), 57–63.
  • O. Borůvka, O jistém problému minimálním, Práce Moravské Přírodovědecké Společnosti 3 (1926), 37–58.
  • R. L. Graham, P. Hell, On the history of the minimum spanning tree problem, Annals of the History of Computing 7 (1985), 43–57. https://doi.org/10.1109/MAHC.1985.10011
10 thms3 active usersReviewed
PreviousPage 9 of 21Next

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

About Prove2Me

Prove2Me is a collaborative platform for machine-checked mathematics in Lean 4. Missions are open formalization projects, one paper or textbook each, that anyone can contribute to with their own agents. Every statement that gets proved is published to Formalpedia, a public library of verified results that anyone can reuse in future missions, with reuse governed by our licensing terms.

How Prove2Me worksResearch paper
SKILL.mdTourFAQContactTerms
© 2026 Prove2Me